51709614 01 2.12 ts - boston laboratory equipment...08/2004 mettler toledo dl50/dl53/dl55/dl58 1-1...

Reference handbook

DL50/DL53/DL55/DL58Titrators

1. Introduction

2. Setup

3. Methods

4. Sample data memory

5. Analysis

6. Auxiliary functions

7. DL58

8. Symbols and explanations

9. Error messages and malfunctions

10. Installation and maintenance

11. Accessories

12. Technical data

13. Index

14. Data sheet

15. ISO certificate, System validation

08/2004 METTLER TOLEDO DL50/DL53/DL55/DL58 1-1

1. Introduction

In contrast to the Quick Guide, this Reference Handbook provides a complete description ofthe operating principles of the DL50, DL53, DL55 and DL58 Titrators. Its layout has been keptmodular to ensure future supplementation or replacement of individual sections or pages; newtexts carry the date of issue in the footer on every page.

Safety notesMeasures for your personal protection and for operational safety are described in Section 2of the Quick Guide. We strongly advise you to read these. The symbols listed there also appearfor texts in this Reference Handbook which require safety measures.

Keywords usedappears before all texts which refer to an error in the measured value acqui-sition, data storage etc.

Note appears before all texts which contain additional explanations.

Index

The index in Section 13 comprises key words from the Quick Guide and the ReferenceHandbook.

Software versionThe Reference Handbook applies to software version 2.x for all four titrators.

Note: All information concerning automation in this titrator's Reference Handbook relatesto the earlier METTLER TOLEDO Sample changer ST20A. Its name continues toappear in some places. Operation of other METTLER TOLEDO sample changersvia your titrator is described in the corresonding Operating Instructions.

The following pages provide an overview of the menus and commands which are availableunder the menu and auxiliary function keys.

Introduction

NOTICE

FCC rulesThis equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to bothPart 15 of the FCC Rules and the radio interference regulations of the Canadian Department of Communications.These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment isoperated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energyand, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radiocommunications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is like to cause harmful interference in whichcase the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense.

1-2 METTLER TOLEDO DL50/DL53/DL55/DL58 08/2004

Menus: Overview

∇

Titrants SETUP

NaOH 0.1 mol/L

HCl 0.1 mol/L

HClO4 0.1 mol/L Esc Delete Add Modify OK

Standard methods METHOD

Equivalence point titr'n

End point titration (EP)Titer by EQP titration

Esc Print Modify

∇

∇

∇

Titrant names SETUPHCl ∆HClO4AgNO3EDTA Esc OK

∇

Method: METHOD

Title

SampleStir

Esc Modify OK∇

Title METHOD

Method ID 00001

Title Equivalence point titr'nDate/time 00-00-0000 00:00

Esc OK

Method: 00001 METHOD

Title

SampleStir

Esc Modify OK∇

Methods METHOD

Method ID 00001

Standard methodsUser methods

Delete Print Modify

Methods METHODMethod ID

Standard methodsUser methodsMETTLER methods

Print OK

Titrant parameters SETUP

Name NaOH

Concentration [mol/L] 0.1

Titer 1 Esc Modify OK

∇

Titrant parameters SETUP

Name HClO4Concentration [mol/L] 0.1

Titer 1 Esc Modify OK

∇

Resources SETUP

Titrants

SensorsTemperature sensors

Print Modify

MethodSetup


Menus: Overview

No. Status Wt/vol. Meth. ID

Add

Add SAMPLE

New sample series

Esc OK

Defined are RUN

Stirrer 1: Stand 1

Sensor 1: DM141Drive 2: 0.1 mol/L AgNO3 Esc Print OK

Sample entry SAMPLE

Number of samples 2

Method ID 00001User

Esc OK

∇

Sample No. 1 SAMPLESample IDWeight [g] 1.19831

Limits [g] 0.02 – 2.0Correction factor f Esc Balance1) OK

Sample No. 1 RUNSample IDWeight [g] 1.23452

Limits [g] 0.02 - 2.0Correction factor f 1.0

Balance1) OK∇

Current sample RUN

No. 1 of 1Sample IDMethod ID 00001

OK

Stir function RUN

Wait time [s] 30Speed [%] 80

Hold2)

Result list RUN

Method: 00001Sample 1 R1 = 29.26 %

OK

∇

Sample No. 2 SAMPLESample IDWeight [g] 1.36712

Limits [g] 0.02 – 2.0Correction factor f Esc Balance1) OK

No. Status Wt/Vol. Meth. ID 1 ready 1.19831 00001

2 ready 1.36712 00001

Delete Print Modify Add

1) appears only if a balance has been defined2) appears only with DL55 and DL58

Table Values Curve2) Hold2)

mV

mL

E – V curve

Samples to be analyzed RUN

Number of samples 1

Method ID 00001User

Start

RunSample


Auxiliary functions: Overview

Sensor Stirrer

Sensor SENSOR

Measure potential

Measure temperatureCalibrate temperature sensors

OK

∇

Measure potential SENSOR

Sensor DG111

Unit of meas. mVTitration stand Stand 1

Esc Modify Start

Measured values SENSOR

43.7 mVStop

BuretteChanger

Sample changer CHANGER

Change lift position

Rotate turntableDispense/rinse

OK

Change lift position CHANGER

Lift position bottom

Esc Modify Start



Stop

Stirrer STIRRER

Titration stand Stand 1

Speed [%] 50

Stop

Stirrer STIRRER


Speed [%] 50

Modify Start

Burette BURETTE

Rinse burette

Rinse tipDispense

OK

Rinse burette BURETTE

Burette drive Drive 2

Esc Modify1) Start



Stop

∇

1) appears only with DL55 and DL58


Auxiliary functions: Overview

Report

*

Results

Results2) RESULTS

Display result list

Perform calculationsDisplay measured values

OK

∇

Result list RESULTS

Method: 00001Sample 1 R1 = 29.26 %

Sample 2 OK

Report REPORT

Output unit writing report

∇

Report3) REPORT

Output Printer

Results NoAll results Yes

Modify Start

∇

2) The parameters appear only when results of a sampledetermination are available

3) The parameters appear only when curves, results orsample data of a sample determination are available

Misc. ... DataTransfer

Miscellaneous MISC.

Define titrator settings

Adjust measuring inputsShorten analysis sequence

OK

∇

Titrator settings MISC.

Date/time format

Date/timeLanguage

Esc Modify OK

Data transfer DATA TRANSFER

Memory card

Computer4)

Remote control4)

OK

∇

Memory card5) DATA TRANSFER

Display directory

Copy from titrator to cardCopy from card to titrator

Esc OK

Formats MISC.

Date format 17-OCT-1995

Time format 17:04 (24 h)

Esc Modify OK

∇

Directory DATA TRANSFER

User methods

ResourcesMemory copies

Esc Print OK

4) appears only if a computer has been defined5) appears only if memory card is formatted

∇


Setup Setup

2. Setup .......................................................................................................... 2-3

2.1 Titrants ....................................................................................................... 2-42.1.1 Delete ....................................................................................................... 2-4

2.1.2 Modify....................................................................................................... 2-4

2.1.3 Add ........................................................................................................... 2-6

2.2 Sensors ...................................................................................................... 2-72.2.1 Delete ....................................................................................................... 2-7

2.2.2 Modify....................................................................................................... 2-7

2.2.3 Add ........................................................................................................... 2-10

2.3 Temperature sensors ................................................................................ 2-11

2.4 Polarized sensors ..................................................................................... 2-13

2.4.1 Modify....................................................................................................... 2-13

2.4.2 Add ........................................................................................................... 2-14

2.5 Auxiliary values ......................................................................................... 2-15

2.6 Titration stands ......................................................................................... 2-17

2.7 Peripherals ................................................................................................. 2-182.7.1 Printer ....................................................................................................... 2-18

2.7.1.1 Centronics interface: Settings for an EPSON printer ............................... 2-19

2.7.1.2 RS232 interface: Settings for an EPSON printer ..................................... 2-20

2.7.2 Balance .................................................................................................... 2-21

2.7.3 System ..................................................................................................... 2-23

2.7.4 Sample changer ....................................................................................... 2-25

2.7.5 External keyboard .................................................................................... 2-26

2.8 Solvents (with sample changer only) ...................................................... 2-272.8.1 Delete ....................................................................................................... 2-27

2.8.2 Modify....................................................................................................... 2-27

2.8.3 Add ........................................................................................................... 2-28

ContentsPage


Setup


Setup

2. Setup

In order to perform titrations, the titrator must be acquainted with the titrants and theirconcentrations and the sensors with a feasible unit of measurement. It must know the burettedrive on which the burette is located and the input to which the sensor is connected. It mustalso be familiar with the settings of the attached devices such as a balance or printer in orderto transfer data. In this menu you define all these chemical and mechanical resources and storethem: you set up your titrator.

When you press the Setup key, the list of resources appears:

Titrants

Sensors

Temperature sensors

Polarized sensors

Auxiliary values

Titration stands

Peripherals

Solvents (only with ST20A)

The titrants and METTLER TOLEDO sensors in most frequent use are already stored in thetitrator. You can not only delete these resources and modify their parameters, but also definenew ones.

Note: All information concerning automation in this titrator's Reference Handbook relates tothe earlier METTLER TOLEDO Sample changer ST20A. Its name continues to appearin some places. Operation of other METTLER TOLEDO sample changers via yourtitrator is described in the corresonding Operating Instructions.

All resources needed for the METTLER methods are stored! If you delete oneof these, the titrator will wait until the start of a titration of the method beforedisplaying the error message that the resource is not installed.

Print

Depending on your choice of resource, its list with the corresponding parameters will be printedout.

ModifyThe list of the selected resources appears.

Setup

NOTICE


Setup

2.1 Titrants

When you select this menu and press <F4>, the stored titrants appear with their concentrationdata:

Titrants

2.1.1 Delete

If you press <F2>, "Delete", the titrant NaOH will be deleted from the list.

2.1.2 Modify

If you press <F4>, "Modify", the parameters of the titrants appear and you can change theirnames and values.

Name NaOH


Titer 1.0

Burette volume 10 mL


Titer do not check

Date/time 00-00-0000 00:00

Name You can change the name by pressing <F4> and selecting a differentname from the list of "Titrant names" which appears:

– Scroll the menu with the ∇ key so that the selector bar is positioned on,e.g. "HClO4" and confirm with OK: the name of the titrant is now HClO4.

Concentration Enter the concentration of the titrant in mol/L.

Titer Change the titer only if you know its value. If you determine the titer of thetitrant with the titrator, its value will be entered here automatically togetherwith the date (see Titer function, Section 3.3.14).

Titrants SETUP

NaOH 0.1 mol/LHCl 0.1 mol/LHCl04 0.1 mol/L ∇

Esc Delete Add Modify OK


Setup

When the date has lapsed, you will receive an appropriate messageduring an ongoing titration method which uses this titer.

Date/time You can neither enter nor delete the date. It refers to the titer determina-tion of the titrant using the method function Titer and is thus entered hereautomatically together with the time (see Titer function, Section 3.3.14)

As soon as you modify a parameter of the titrant, the date/time entry willbe deleted. The expiry date of the titer is an exception: If you modify this,date and time will not be deleted.

Titrants

If you select "check after" and then press <F4>, the following maskappears:

Check on SETUP

Day 1Month 1Year 1997

Esc OK

Burette volume Select the volume of the burettes you wish to use with <F4>: 1, 5, 10 or20 mL.

Burette drive Press <F4> to select: Drive 1.

DL50/DL53: These titrators do not have the "Modify" command.

Titer You can choose whether to enter a date when you should check the titerof the titrant:– Press <F4>, select "check on" in the mask which appears and then

press <F4> again:

Check after SETUP

No. of days 10

Esc OK


Setup

Any change to a parameter is always stored without a message if you press a Menu or Auxiliaryfunction key.

2.1.3 Add

With this command you add a titrant to the titrants list, e.g. NaOH of concentration 1.0 mol/Lor with a different burette volume or a titrant not yet on the list. The following parameters alwaysappear:

Name NaOH


Titer 1.0



Titer do not check

Date/time 00-00-0000 00:00

You can modify the parameters by the procedure described in Section 2.1.2. If you define, e.g.several NaOH solutions with the same concentration, you must also flag the names so that thetitrator can distinguish these, e.g. NaOH/1. If you do not, the following message appears:

Titrants

Storage procedureThe titrant with its modified parameters is stored when you confirm both the parameter maskand the list of titrants with OK. If you quit the list with Esc, the following message appears:

Resource exists SETUP

Modify nameOverwrite parameters

OK

Save changes? SETUP

NoYes

OK

Modify: The parameter mask for modification of the name appears.

Overwrite: The modified parameters are adopted.


Setup

You can attach the listed sensors only to a pH option (see Sections 2.4 and 10.4).

2.2.1 Delete

If you press <F2>, "Delete", the sensor DG111 will be deleted from the list.

2.2.2 Modify

If you press <F4>, "Modify", the parameters of the sensors whose names and values you canchange appear.

Name DG111

Unit of meas. pH

Sensor input Sensor 1

Zero point [unit] 7.0

Slope [mV/unit] –59.16

Temperature [°C] 25.0

Date/time 00–00–0000 00:00

Name You can change the name by pressing <F4> and selecting a differentname from the list of "Sensor names" that appears.

Note: You do not need to define a reference electrode as it is part of thesensing electrode at the corresponding sensor option (see Section10.4).

Unit of measure- You select possible measurement units for the sensor from the selectionmenu.

Sensors

2.2 Sensors

When you select this menu and press <F4>, the stored METTLER TOLEDO sensors with theirmeasurement unit appear:

Sensors SETUP

DG111 pHDG101 pHDG113 mV ∇


ment


SetupSensors

Unit of measure- mV: Either there is no other suitable measurement unit with calibra-tion parameters for the sensor or you need only mV. If you selectthe unit mV for a sensor, the calibration parameters zero point,slope and temperature are ignored by the titrator.

pH: If you select pH, next enter the calibration parameters for a pHelectrode or have them entered by the titrator (see page 2-9:Notes 1 and 2).

pM: M represents any cation. If you select pM, next enter the cali-bration parameters for a pM electrode or have them entered bythe titrator (see page 2-9: Notes 1 and 2).

pX: X represents any anion. If you select pX, next enter the calibra-tion parameters for a pX electrode or have them entered by thetitrator (see page 2-9; Notes 1 and 2).

%T: If you select %T, next enter the calibration parameters for aphototrode (measurement unit: transmission, see "Phototrode"Operating Instructions.

A: If you select A, next enter the calibration parameters for aphototrode (measurement unit: transmission). The extinction[A = -log T] is calculated from this (see Section 8.4.1: Results).

µS/cm: If you select µS/cm, next enter the calibration parameters of theconductivity cell.

mS/cm: If you select mS/cm, next enter the calibration parameters forthe conductivity cell.

You can perform conductivity measurements and conductivitytitrations with a conductometer fitted with an analog output.

Sensor input Press <F4> to select: Sensor 1, 2, 3 or 4. The numbers refer to the slotof a pH option (see Section 10.4).

ment


Setup Sensors

Zero point The zero point is the measured value at which the sensor indicates 0 mVvoltage (measuring chain zero point).• For the zero point of a pH electrode this is pH0 with the unit pH.• For the zero point of an ion selective electrode this is pM0 with the unit

pM, or pX0 with the unit pX.• The zero point of the phototrode is normally 0%T (100% T =

1000 mV).• The zero point of a conductivity cell is normally 0 µS/cm or 0 mS/cm.

Slope The slope of the sensor is the voltage change in mV per measurementunit.• For the slope of a pH electrode this is the unit: mV/pH.• For the slope of an ion selective electrode this is the unit: mV/pM or

mV/pX.• The slope of a phototrode is normally 10 mV/%T.• For the slope of a conductivity cell this is the unit: mV/µS*cm-1 or

mV/mS*cm-1.

Temperature Change the temperature if necessary: The current calibration tempera-ture is either• entered by you at the start of a calibration method (see Section 5.1)

or• measured automatically if you have attached and defined a tempera-

ture sensor (see Section 3.3.2).

Date/time You can neither enter the date nor delete it. It refers to the calibration ofthe sensor using the method function Calibration and is entered hereautomatically together with the time (see Calibration function, Section3.3.13).

Notes

1. When the titrator is delivered, the defined calibration data are theoretical values of a newsensor. You must perform a calibration of your sensor if you wish to determine accuratevalues (see Calibration function, Section 3.3.13).

2. With a calibration of pH, pM or pX sensors, the calibration data (zero point, slope,temperature) are entered here automatically together with the date.

3. As soon as you change a sensor parameter, the date/time entry is deleted.


Setup

You should never transfer the calibration data of glass electrodes which youobtain at sensor input 1 if you attach the electrode to, e.g. sensor input 2. Toobtain correct values, recalibrate the electrode!

Storage procedureThe sensor with the modified parameters is stored when you confirm both the parameter listand the list of the sensors with OK. The modification of a parameter is always stored when youpress a Menu or Auxiliary function key (see corresponding section at the end of Section 2.1.2).

2.2.3 Add

With this command you add a sensor to the sensor list, e.g. a DG111 sensor with differentcalibration parameters or a completely new sensor. The following parameters always appear:

Name DG

Unit of meas. mV

Sensor input Sensor 1

Zero point [unit] 7.0

Slope [mV/unit] –59.16


Date/time 00–00–0000 00:00

You change the parameters by the procedure described in Section 2.2.2. If you define, e.g.several DG111 sensors, you must also flag the name to ensure the titrator can distinguishthese, e.g. DG111/2. If you do not, a message appears (see Section 2.1.3).

Sensors

NOTICE


Setup

You can attach temperature sensors only to a pH option (see Section 10.4).

You can neither delete a temperature sensor from the list nor add a new one to it. However,you can define, e.g. several Pt100s or Pt1000s at the same sensor input.

Select, e.g. TEMP A, press <F4> and the following parameters appear:

Name TEMP A

Sensor type Pt100

Sensor input Temp 1

Zero point [°C] 0.0

Date/time 00–00–0000 00:00

Name You can not change the sensor name.

Sensor type Press <F4> to select: Pt100 or Pt1000 (see Section 9.5).

Sensor input Press <F4> to select: Temp 1, 2, 3 or 4: The numbers refer to the slot ofa pH option (see Section 10.4).

Zero point The zero point of a Pt sensor is the difference between the measuredvalue and a reference value, e.g. 0 °C of an ice bath.

Date/time You can neither enter nor delete the date. It refers to the calibration of thePt sensor and is entered here automatically together with the time (seeSection 6.1.3).

2.3 Temperature sensors

When you select this menu and press <F4>, the stored temperature sensors appear with thesensor type:

Temperature sensors

Temperature sensors SETUP

TEMP A Pt100TEMP B Pt100TEMP C Pt1000 ∇

Esc Modify OK


Setup

Notes

1. The defined zero point is the theoretical value of a new Pt sensor. You must perform acalibration of your sensor if you wish to determine the exact value. With a calibration thezero point is entered here automatically with the date (see Section 6.1.3: Calibratetemperature sensors).

2. As soon as you modify a parameter of the temperature sensor, the date/time entry isdeleted.

You should not transfer the zero point of temperature sensors which you obtainat input Temp 1 if you attach the sensors to, e.g. input Temp 2! To obtain correctvalues, recalibrate the sensor!

Storage procedureThe Pt sensor with the modified parameters is stored when you confirm both the parametermask and the list of the Pt sensors with OK. The modification of a parameter is always storedwhen you press a Menu or Auxiliary function key (see corresponding paragraph at the end ofSection 2.1.2).

Temperature sensors

NOTICE


Setup

Polarized sensors SETUP

DM142

Esc Add Modify OK

Sensor parameters SETUP

Name DM142Sensor input Sensor 2

Esc Modify OK

Polarized sensors

2.4 Polarized sensors

When you select this menu and press <F4>, "DM142" appears as the only polarized METTLERTOLEDO electrode stored in the titrator:

You can attach this sensor only to a KF option (see Section 10.4).

Note: If you have added polarized sensors to the list, the Delete command appears (<F2>).

2.4.1 Modify

If you press <F4>, "Modify", the name and sensor input of the DM142 appear:

Name You can change the name by pressing <F4> and selecting a differentname from the list of "Sensor names" that appears.

Sensor input Press <F4> to select: Sensor 1, 2, 3 or 4. The numbers refer to the slotof a KF option (see Section 10.4).

Storage procedure

The sensor with the modified parameters is stored when you confirm both the parameter listand the list of the sensors with OK. The modification of a parameter is always stored when youpress a Menu or Auxiliary function key (see corresponding paragraph at the end of Section2.1.2).


Setup

Sensor parameters SETUP

Name DMSensor input Sensor 2

Esc Modify OK

Polarized sensors

2.4.2 Add

With this command you add a polarized sensor to the sensor list. The following parametersalways appear:

You change the parameters by the procedure described in Section 2.4.1. If you define, e.g.several DM142 sensors, you must also flag the name to ensure the titrator can distinguishthese, e.g. DM142/2. If you do not, a message appears (see Section 2.1.3).


Setup Auxiliary values

Auxiliary values SETUP

H1 1.0H2 1.0H3 1.0 ∇

Esc Modify OK

Auxiliary value parameters SETUPAuxiliary value H1IDValue 1.0Date/time 00-00-0000 00:00 Esc OK

2.5 Auxiliary values

When you select this menu and press <F4>, the 20 memory locations for auxiliary valuesappear: H1 - H20. You can use the Auxiliary value function to assign the results of a method,such as blank values, potentials or volume or amount of substance consumption to thismemory. These values are then entered here automatically together with the date (see Section3.3.15).

You yourself can also enter numeric values as an auxiliary value here and call them up underthe Calculation function.

No auxiliary values are defined in the titrator on delivery.

You can neither delete the memory locations nor add new ones. If you select, e.g. H1 and press<F4>, the following appears:

Auxiliary value You can not change H1.

ID Enter an identification if desired.

Value Enter the value.

Date/time You can neither enter nor delete the date. It refers to the determinationof the auxiliary value using the method function Auxiliary value and isentered here automatically together with the time (see Section 3.3.15).


SetupAuxiliary values

Notes

1. You can delete the data of an auxiliary value only by overwriting them yourself or have thetitrator overwrite them using the Auxiliary value function.

2. The titrator does not tell you if you overwrite an auxiliary value. If you make frequent useof the auxiliary value memory, you should thus print out a list of its values from time to time(see page 2-3).

3. If you modify a parameter of the auxiliary value, the date/time entry is deleted.

Storage procedureThe auxiliary value with the modified parameters is stored when you confirm both theparameter mask and the list of auxiliary values with OK. The modification of a parameter isalways stored when you press a Menu or Auxiliary function key (see appropriate paragraphat the end of Section 2.1.2).


Setup

2.6 Titration stands

When you select this menu and press <F4>, the names of the five possible titration standsappear:

Titration stands

Titration stands SETUP

Stand 1Stand 2ST20A ∇

Esc Modify OK

Stand 1 is the titration stand you receive with the basic version of the titrator.

Stand 2 is the second titration stand of a dual titration stand.

ST20A is the sample changer titration stand.

Auto stand is the name of the titration stand on which you can run a sample serieswithout being prompted to insert the next sample (see Section 5.1). Withthis stand you can use, e.g. a robot to change the samples.

External stand is a titration stand you have set up in addition to the above-mentionedtitration stands if you, e.g. attach a stirrer to a rod stand.

You can neither delete a titration stand from the the list nor add a new one. If you select, e.g.Stand 1 and press <F4>, the following appears:

Titration stand parameters SETUPName Stand 1Stirrer output Stirrer 1

Esc Modify OK

Name You can not change the name of the titration stand.

Stirrer output Press <F4> to select the output for the stirrer: Stirrer 1, 2, 3, 4 or "Not atDL".

1, 2, 3, 4 refer to the position of the sensor option (see Section 10.4).

Select "Not at DL" if you use a stirrer which is not attached to the titrator:The wait time specified under the Stir function is allowed to elapse withinthe method, but you yourself are responsible for arranging stirring (seeStir function, Section 3.3.3).


SetupPeripherals

2.7 Peripherals

When you select this menu and press <F4>, the names of the devices which you can attachto the titrator via the RS232C interfaces, the Centronics interface or the DIN socket appear.These devices are not defined by software in the factory.

Printer Not defined

Balance Not defined

System Not defined

Sample changer Not defined

External keyboard Not defined

2.7.1 Printer

To define and set your printer, select Printer and press <F4>:

Status Press <F4> to select "Defined".

Printer type Select the type from the selection menu:

EPSON ESC/P

HP PCL Level 3

IBM Proprinter

ASCII

GA42

You can change the settings for the selected printer in the parameter mask, which appearswhen you press <F4>.

Note: On delivery of the titrator, the Centronics option is installed in slot 4 which has a parallelinterface for the printer connection (see Section 10.4). An RS option with a serial printerinterface has to be installed in slot 4 in order to use the METTLER TOLEDO Printer GA42.

Printer SETUP

Status Not definedPrinter type EPSON ESC/P

Esc Modify OK


Setup

2.7.1.1 Centronics interface: Settings for an EPSON printer

Examples of default settings for an EPSON printer:

Type LX/SX

Paper Fanfold

Paper format 81/2 * 11"

Automatic form feed No

Frame lines Straight

Type Press <F4> to select : "LX/SX" or "LQ/Stylus".

Paper Press <F4> to select : "Fanfold" or "Single sheet".Single sheet:- A form feed is effected at the end of a page.- If you select Yes for "Automatic form feed", a footer and a header will

be printed out on every page.

You must not trigger a line or form feed at the printer if youhave selected "Automatic form feed" for "Single sheet"!You can do this on the titrator with the following key com-binations:<Shift + F1> triggers a line feed,<Shift + F2> triggers a form feed.

Paper format Press <F4> to select:• DIN A4 (width = 21 cm, length = 29.7 cm)• 81/2 * 11" (width = 81/2 inches, length = 11 inches)• 81/2 * 12" (width = 81/2 inches, length = 12 inches)

Form feed Press <F4> to select: "Yes" or "No".• Yes: The printer initiates a form feed after every document.• No: The individual documents are separated by a distance of 2 lines.

Frame lines Press <F4> to select the frame for the report:• Straight: The report is framed with straight lines.• Dotted: The report is framed with dotted lines; this speeds up the

printout by a factor of 2.• None (no frame): Printing is fastest with this parameter.

HP printers: Selection of the lines does not influence the speed.

Peripherals

NOTICE


Setup

2.7.1.2 RS232 interface: Settings for an EPSON printer

You can also attach printers to a serial interface if you have installed an RS option in slot 4 (seeSection 10.4). You can use this interface to attach a GA42 Printer. While no software settingsare necessary for the GA42 Printer, you must set its DIP switch 2 to the ON position (see GA42Operating Instructions).

Example of the default settings for an EPSON printer:

Type LX/SX

Paper Fanfold

Paper format 81/2 * 11"

Automatic form feed No

Frame lines Straight

Baudrate 2400

Parity Even

Number of data bits 8 Bits

Number of stop bits 1 Bit

The settings for the first 5 parameters are the same as those for theCentronics interface (see Section 2.7.1.1).

Baud rate Press <F4> to select: 1200, 2400, 4800 or 9600.

Parity Press <F4> to select: "Even", "Odd" or "None".

Data bits Press <F4> to select: 7 or 8 bits.

Stop bits Press <F4> to select: 1 or 2 bit(s).

Peripherals


Setup


Transmission Press <F4> to select: "Unidirectional" or "Bidirectional".

UnidirectionalOn inquiry of the weight, the balance continuously transfers the current weight value (withouta stability check), which is displayed by the titrator. You must confirm this display with <F5>for the value to be accepted.

Bidirectional

On inquiry of the weight, the balance transfers the current weight value when requested by thetitrator, which then displays it (with stability check).

Many METTLER TOLEDO balances show the weight limits in the balance display (see Section4.2). The titrator accepts the stable weight value when you press either <F5> on the titrator orthe transfer key of the balance.

2.7.2 Balance

To define and set your balance, select Balance and press <F4>:

Peripherals

mode

Balance SETUP

Status Not definedTransmn mode Unidirectional

Esc Modify OK

Command from titrator

Configuration: "Send Stable"

Data to titrator

Balance

("Send on Transfer")Titrator

Balance

Data to titrator

Configuration: "Send Cont."Titrator


Setup

Notes

1. On delivery of the titrator, the Centronics option is installed which has a 9-pin RS232interface for the attachment of a balance (see Section 10.4). If you install an RS option inslot 4, its balance interface is 8-pin. Depending on the installation, you must then have theright connection cable (see Section 11.2: Peripherals).

RS232 METTLER TOLEDO balances with RS interface: Order No. 59759, 229029METTLER TOLEDO balances with LC interface: Order No. 229065SARTORIUS balances with RS interface: Order No. 51190363

RS232 METTLER TOLEDO balances with RS interface: Order No. 51107195, 51107196METTLER TOLEDO balances with LC interface: Order No. 229185SARTORIUS balances with RS interface: Order No. 200495

2. The data output of the METTLER TOLEDO balance you wish to attach must be set asfollows:

• Baud rate: 2400• Parity: even• Mode: "Send Cont." for transmission mode Unidirectional

"Send Stable" ("Send on Transfer") for transmission mode Bidirectional.

3. The following settings are important with AT balances:

• Unit: Prt on Print/Transfer command ong Weighing unit in g

• Int-FACE: SENd S.Stb Data transmission mode: Standbybd 2400 Baud rate: 2400PAr -E- Parity: evenHS OFF Handshake (XON/XOFF) off

4. With AG, PG, AB, PB and PR balances, the LC-RS8 cable must be set as follows:

For bidirectional transfer For unidirectional transfer

• Left switch: Position 0 • Left switch: Position 7• Middle switch: Position 3 • Middle switch: Position 3• Right switch: Position 4 • Right switch: Position 4

5. In case of SARTORIUS balances you must select Bidirectional as the transmission mode.The data output of the balance you wish to attach must be set as follows:

• Data output: Ext. print command/without stability• Baud rate: 2400• Parity: even• Stop bit: 1• Weight unit: g

Peripherals

9-pin:

8-pin:


Setup

You can modify the settings for the Computer in the parameter mask, which appears whenyou press <F4>:

Baud rate 4800

Parity Even

Number data bits 8 bits

Number stop bits 1 bit

Bar code to computer No

Character set ASCII

Send mode Spontaneous

Communication protocol Normal

Start/end character ''/ CR



Peripherals

System SETUP

Status Not definedInstrument type Computer

Esc Modify OK

2.7.3 System

To define and set your computer or terminal, select System and press <F4>:

Instrument type SETUP

ComputerColor terminalMonochrome term.

Esc Modify


Instrument type Press <F4> to select from the selection menu:


SetupPeripherals



Bar code Press <F4> to select: "Yes" or "No".

Yes: If you have attached a bar-code reader to the external keyboard, theread-in bar code will be sent directly to the computer. Depending onthe program you have loaded, this bar code can be used to triggercommands from the computer. (See Section 6.8.4: Bar-code stringand Section 10.8.1: Attaching a bar-code reader.)

Character set Press <F4> to select: "ASCII" or "DL" .ASCII: The standard character set (HEX 20 to HEX 7E) for the

output of text to the computer is used.DL: The character set used in the titrator is used.

Notice: If you select DL, you must specify 8 for the num-ber of data bits!

Send mode Press <F4> to select: "Spontaneous" or "On request".Spontaneous: The titrator sends the computer orders and data, as well

as what has been generated (assuming that the computeris ready).

On request: The titrator waits for the corresponding inquiry from thecomputer before it sends an order or data.

Communication Press <F4> to select: "Normal" or "Reduced".Normal: The data received by the titrator or computer are checked

and any errors given with messages (safety mechanismactive).

Reduced: The received data are neither checked nor acknowl-edged so that no error messages are given (safety mech-anism passive).

Start/end Press <F4> to select: " '' / CR " or " STX / ETX ".These start and end characters for the messages to be sent depend onthe input possibility of your computer.

The computer needs an RS232C interface (DTE). The parameters baud rate, parity, numberof data bits and number of stop bits are freely selectable. Connection cables are listed inSection 11.2.You will find additional information on the communication between titrator and computer inSection 6.8.2 and in the Operating Instructions for the computer interface (see Section 11.2).

protocol

character


Setup Peripherals

You can change the settings for the selected Terminal in the parameter mask which appearswhen you press <F4>:

Baud rate 9600

Parity Even

Number data bits 8 bits

Number stop bits 1 bit





You can use a terminal of the type DEC VT340 or DEC VT241 as a color terminal and eithera DEC VT330 or DEC VT240 type as a monochrome terminal. The connection cable is listedin Section 11.2.

You will find additional information on the configuration of the terminals and their operation inSection 10.9.

2.7.4 Sample changer

Note: All information concerning automation in this titrator's Reference Handbook relates tothe earlier METTLER TOLEDO Sample changer ST20A. Its name continues to appearin some places.

To define the sample changer, select Sample changer and press <F4>:

Sample changer SETUP

Status Not defined

Esc Modify OK



SetupPeripherals

External keyboard SETUP

Status Not definedLayout US International

Esc Modify OK

2.7.5 External keyboard

You can attach a PC keyboard which has a DIN socket using a DIN cable (see Section 10.8:Attaching a keyboard). To define the keyboard, select External keyboard and press <F4>:


Layout Press <F4> to select: "US International", "Swiss (German)", "French","German" or "Polish".


Setup Solvents

Solvents (only with ST20A) SETUP

H2OCH3OHCHCl3 ∇


2.8 Solvents (with sample changer only)

The parameters of this resource are needed only if you have defined and attached a samplechanger. You can connect time-controlled pumps, electromagnetic valves or dispensers to thesample changer to dispense solvents.

When you select this menu and press <F4>, the stored solvents appear:

2.8.1 Delete

If you press <F2>, "Delete", H2O will be deleted from the list.

2.8.2 Modify

If you press <F4>, "Modify", the following appears:

Solvent parameters SETUP

Name H2OPump rate [mL/min] 200.0ST20A output RINSE

Esc Modify OK

Name You can modify the name by pressing <F4> and choosing a differentname from the list of "Solvent names" that appears.

Pump rate The titrator uses the pump rate to calculate the volume to be dispensedfor time-controlled pumps or electromagnetic valves.You must determine the pump rate of each metering device beforehandfor every solvent:– Add the solvent using the metering device to a measuring cylinder for

1 minute (stopwatch) and note the volume.– Repeat this procedure for, e.g. 20, 30 and 40 seconds.– Calculate the mean value per minute for the different volumes and

enter this value.


Setup

Solvent parameters SETUP

Name H2OPump rate [mL/min] 200.0ST20A output RINSE

Esc Modify OK

Solvents

Output Press <F4> to select the ST20A output to which you will attach themetering device: "DOSE", "RINSE" or "DISPENSER".

Storage procedureThe solvent with the modified parameters is stored when you confirm both the parameter maskand the list of solvents with OK. The modification of a parameter is always stored when youpress a Menu or Auxiliary function key (see appropriate paragraph at the end of Section 2.1.2).

2.8.3 Add

You can use this command to add a solvent to the list of solvents. The following mask alwaysappears:

You can modify the parameters by the procedure described in Section2.8.2.

If you define, e.g. several solvents with the same name, you must also flag these to ensure thetitrator can distinguish them, e.g. H2O/2. If you do not, a message appears (see Section 2.1.3).


Method Method

ContentsPage

3. Methods ..................................................................................................... 3-3

3.1 Selecting methods .................................................................................... 3-43.1.1 Method ID.................................................................................................... 3-4

3.1.2 Standard methods ....................................................................................... 3-5

3.1.3 User methods .............................................................................................. 3-6

3.1.4 METTLER methods..................................................................................... 3-6

3.2 Modifying a method .................................................................................. 3-7

3.2.1 Storage procedure ...................................................................................... 3-7

3.3 Functions ................................................................................................... 3-103.3.1 Title.............................................................................................................. 3-11

3.3.2 Sample ........................................................................................................ 3-12

3.3.3 Stir ............................................................................................................... 3-16

3.3.4 Measure ...................................................................................................... 3-17

3.3.5 Dispense ..................................................................................................... 3-19

3.3.6 EQP titration (equivalence point titration) .................................................... 3-20

3.3.6.1 Titrant/Sensor .............................................................................................. 3-20

3.3.6.2 Predispensing ............................................................................................. 3-21

3.3.6.3 Titrant addition............................................................................................. 3-22

3.3.6.4 Measure mode ............................................................................................ 3-25

3.3.6.5 Recognition ................................................................................................. 3-28

3.3.6.6 Termination.................................................................................................. 3-33

3.3.6.7 Evaluation ................................................................................................... 3-34

3.3.7 EP titration (end point titration) .................................................................... 3-37

3.3.7.1 Titrant/Sensor .............................................................................................. 3-37

3.3.7.2 Predispensing ............................................................................................. 3-38


3.3.7.4 End point ..................................................................................................... 3-41

3.3.7.5 Tendency ..................................................................................................... 3-42

3.3.7.6 Termination.................................................................................................. 3-42

3.3.8 Learn titration .............................................................................................. 3-43


MethodMethod

Page

3.3.9 EQP titration (Ipol/Upol) .............................................................................. 3-45

3.3.9.1 Titrant/Sensor .............................................................................................. 3-45

3.3.9.2 Indication ..................................................................................................... 3-46

3.3.9.3 Predispensing ............................................................................................. 3-48


3.3.9.5 Measure mode ............................................................................................ 3-49

3.3.9.6 Recognition ................................................................................................. 3-50

3.3.9.7 Termination.................................................................................................. 3-52

3.3.9.8 Evaluation ................................................................................................... 3-53

3.3.10 EP titration (Ipol/Upol) ................................................................................. 3-56

3.3.10.1 Titrant/Sensor .............................................................................................. 3-56

3.3.10.2 Indication ..................................................................................................... 3-57

3.3.10.3 Predispensing ............................................................................................. 3-59


3.3.10.5 End point ..................................................................................................... 3-60

3.3.10.6 Tendency ..................................................................................................... 3-61

3.3.10.7 Termination.................................................................................................. 3-61

3.3.11 pH/mV-stat .................................................................................................. 3-62

3.3.12 Calculation .................................................................................................. 3-66

3.3.13 Calibration ................................................................................................... 3-69

3.3.14 Titer ............................................................................................................. 3-72

3.3.15 Auxiliary value ............................................................................................. 3-73

3.3.16 Report ......................................................................................................... 3-74


Method

3. Methods

The titrator performs analyses automatically with the aid of predefined methods. When thetitrator is delivered, the Method menu already holds standard methods and methods devel-oped by METTLER. You can modify these methods to suit your requirements and save themas User methods.

A complete titration method comprises sample preparation, dispensing of auxiliary solutions,stirring and wait times, the actual titration, result calculation and a report. These sub-steps aredefined as Functions in the titrator and they are executed in succession in an analysis. Theindividual functions comprise Parameters, whose values or names you can modify.

You modify a method by changing the parameters of the preset functions.

Method

Method

Functions

modifyParameters


Method

3.1 Selecting methods

When you press the Method key, the following appears in the display:

Method ID _ _ _ _ _

Standard methods

User methods

METTLER methods

Under Method ID you can call up a method stored with an identification number; these are theuser and METTLER methods.

Standard methods are methods we have entered in the factory without a method identification.

User methods are the methods you have defined and saved (they are stored in the user datamemory).

METTLER methods are applications we have developed and stored for you.

PrintMethod ID: The recalled method is printed out with its functions and parameters.

Method groups: The list of methods of the selected group is printed out.

3.1.1 Method ID

The method identification is the 5-place, numeric identifier of a method (see Title function,Section 3.3.1).

– If you are familiar with the identification, enter it and press <F4>: The list of the functions ofthis method appears (see Section 3.2).

Selecting methods

Note: With user methods, you can enter an asterisk (*) after the first, second or third digit ofthe method ID: This replaces the remaining digits, e.g. 1*: All methods whose ID startswith 1 appear in the display. When you confirm the desired ID with OK, the function listof the selected method appears immediately.

Methods METHOD

Method ID 00001Standard methodsUser methods ∇

Delete Print Modify


Method Selecting methods

DeleteWhen you press <F2>, the selection menu "Delete method?" appears in which you can confirmor cancel the command:

• Yes: The method will be deleted.

• No: The method remains stored.

If you wish to delete a METTLER method or a user method that is stored in the sample datamemory, an error message appears. You can not delete these methods (see Section 3.1.4 and4.1).

3.1.2 Standard methods

If you select this group, the list of 21 methods entered in the factory appears with titles (seeSection 5.2 of the Quick Guide). The standard methods are used as basic methods for thedevelopment of your own methods and can not be called up to perform an analysis as theyhave no method identification.

As soon as you allocate an identification to a standard method, it is automatically stored as auser method with a method ID when saved and can be called up by you for the analysis.

The parameters of the other functions are defined with default values or names for all methods;you can accept or modify these (see Sections 3.2 and 3.3).

Print

The selected method with its functions and parameters is printed.


MethodSelecting methods

3.1.3 User methods

If you select this group, a list of methods with the identification (and the name) first appearsif you have stored modified standard or METTLER methods, e.g.:

User methods METHOD

611115200001 ∇

Esc Delete Print Modify

Delete

When you press <F2>, the selection menu "Delete method?" appears in which you can confirmor cancel the command:

• Yes: The method will be deleted.

• No: The method remains stored.

Note: The "Delete" command is not available when the method is stored in the sample datamemory (see Section 4.1).

Print

The selected method with its functions and parameters is printed.

3.1.4 METTLER methods

If you select this group, a list of applications developed by us with the identification and thename of the method appears:

METTLER methods METHOD

90001 Acid content90002 Calibration pH electrode90003 Calibration F- electrode ∇

Esc Print Modify

You can modify METTLER methods to suit your requirements, but you must then give them anew method identification under the Title function in order to save them (see Section 3.3.1).

PrintThe selected method with its functions and parameters is printed.


Method Modifying a method

3.2 Modifying a method

You have selected, e.g. the "Equivalence point titration" under standard methods and thenpress <F4>: The list of the functions of this method appears.

Title

Sample

Stir

EQP titration

Calculation

Calculation

Calculation

Report

You can modify the parameters of all functions:

– Select the function and press <F4>: The mask with the Parameters defined for the functionappears and you can then change their values and names (see Section 3.3).

3.2.1 Storage procedure

1. Every modified method is stored when you• confirm the corresponding parameter masks of the individual functions and• the list of the functions with OK.

If you switch off the titrator before doing this, your changes will be discarded: all parametersare first written to the RAM (volatile memory) of the titrator and are not stored until thefunction list has been confirmed.

After modification of the parameters of a function, you can save the method. The followingsequence is an example of the standard method "Equivalence point titration":

Method: METHOD

TitleSampleStir ∇

Esc Modify OK

You modify the Title function by entering, e.g. the method identification00001 and confirming it with OK (see also Section 3.3.1):


Method


TitleSampleStir ∇

Esc Modify OK

If you now press <F5>, the mask of the method groups reappears: themethod is stored.

As method 00001 is selected automatically, the list of the functionsreappears immediately when <F4> is pressed to allow modification ofother functions.

2. If you quit the list of the functions with Esc after you have modified parameters of func-tions, the following appears:

Save method? METHOD

NoYes

OK

No: Changes are not stored.Yes: The titrator stores all modified parameter values.

The same message appears if you press a Menu or Auxiliary function key.

Modifying a method

Methods METHOD

Method ID 00001Standard methodsUser methods ∇

Delete Print Modify


Method

3. Several functions such as "EQP titration" have a list of parameters which have sub-parameters. If you quit their mask with Esc after modifications, the following appears:

Modifying a method

No: Changes are not stored.Yes: The titrator stores the modified parameter values.

4. On storage, the titrator checks the method and, if it has found several errors, draws yourattention to the first of them.

a. When you have confirmed the error message, the list of method functions appears withthe selection bar on the first faulty function. After you have corrected its parameters andsaved the method again, the next faulty function appears etc.

b. If you have entered an existing method identification under the Title function, the follow-ing appears:

Save changes? METHOD

NoYes

OK

Method ID exists METHOD

Modify IDOverwrite method

OK

Modify IDThe list of method functions appears; under the Title function you canmodify the method ID and then save the method.

Overwrite methodThe new or modified method is stored, that with the same identificationdeleted.


Method

3.3 Functions

You select all functions whose parameters you wish to modify by the procedure described inSections 3.1 and 3.2. The following explanations of all functions of the standard and METTLERmethods as well as their parameters thus pertain to the Modify command. The order of thefollowing sections corresponds to the below list of functions.

Title

Sample

Stir

Measure

Dispense

EQP titration

EP titration

Learn titration

EQP titration (Ipol/Upol)

EP titration (Ipol/Upol)

pH/mV-stat

Calculation

Calibration

Titer

Auxiliary value

Report

Functions


Method

3.3.1 Title

This function is used for recognition of the titration method. You must enter its method IDparameter. You use this identification to call up the stored methods. The function has nomeaning in the sequence of the method. The following example shows the title mask of thestandard method "Equivalence point titration" (see Sections 3.2. and 3.2.1).

Title

Method ID Enter a number with max. 5 characters (letters also admissible).You can not enter identifications in the range 90000 to 99999: they arereserved for METTLER methods.Asterisks (*) are not allowed for the method ID!

Title Enter a title for the method.

Date/time Date and time are entered here automatically when you save a modifiedmethod. You can neither delete not overwrite this information.

Title METHOD

Method ID _ _ _ _ _Title Equivalence point titr'nDate/time 00-00-0000 00:00

Esc OK


Method

3.3.2 Sample

Here you define the parameters needed for the entry of the sample data such as weight orvolume, the titration stand on which the sample should be titrated and whether the temperatureof the sample solution should be measured.

Sample ID

Entry type Weight

Molar mass M 100

Equivalent number z 1


Temperature sensor Manual

Note: If samples which are determined with this method are stored in the sample data memoryas "ready", you can not modify the sample ID and the entry type (see Section 4.1).During a sample series, you can modify only the numeric parameter values for theST20A titration stand (see following page and Section 5.2.3).

Sample ID Enter the identification of the sample if required. This is adopted for allsamples of a sample series. You can also enter and modify the ID in theSample menu (see Section 4.1).

Entry type Select from the selection menu: "Weight", "Volume" or "Fixed volume".

Weight: Press <F4> to show the mask in which you can define the rangewhich the sample weight should not violate:• Lower limit [g]• Upper limit [g]

Volume: Press <F4> to show the mask in which you can define the rangewhich the added volume should not violate:• Lower limit [mL]• Upper limit [mL]

You do not enter the actual weight or volume until the sample preparationor when the titrator requests this information after the start of the method(see Section 5.1). If you violate the defined range, you receive an appro-priate message.

Fixed volume: Press <F4> to show the mask in which you can enter thevolume.You can not modify this entry in the sample preparation!

Sample


Method

Molar mass M You can enter only one molar mass and one equivalent number for thecalculation. If your sample contains several substances which have to bedetermined by equivalence points in the titration, you must enter theirmolar mass and equivalent number in constant C under the Calculationfunction (see Section 3.3.12).

Titration stand Select the titration stand at which you wish to determine the sample fromthe selection menu: "Stand 1", "Stand 2", "ST20A", "Auto stand" or"External stand" (see Section 2.6).

Temperature Press <F4> to select the sensor if you have attached one; if not, select"Manual": the temperature entered before starting the method will then beadopted in the processing of the method (see Section 5.1).

This parameter is used for the automatic measurement or adoption of thetemperature of the sample solution before the start of the Measure,EQP/EP/Learn titration and pH/mV-stat functions. Thus the slope of thepH electrode is temperature-corrected and incorporated in the calcula-tion of the pH value (see Section 2.3: Temperature sensors).

ST20A titration standIf you are working with a sample changer, here you define whether you wish to pump solvent,rinse the sensor and/or condition. Press <F4> to display:

Pump No

Pump No

Rinse No

Conditioning No

Pump (1) You have attached a pump to the sample changer that should pumpsolvent into the titration vessel before every titration.

– Press <F4> to activate the parameter, in the mask that appears select"Yes" and then press <F4> again:

Equivalent

Pump METHOD

Solvent H2OVolume [mL] 10Stir No

Esc Modify OK

Sample

number z

sensor


Method

Pump (1) – Select the solvent from the list (press <F4>) which contains thesolvents you have defined in the Setup menu. This solvent also definesthe ST20A output to which you must attach the pump (see Section 2.8).

– Enter the volume that should be dispensed. You have defined thepump rate of the device in the Setup menu.

– Select whether the dispensing operation should be stirred (Yes) or not(No).

Pump (2) If you have attached a second pump to the sample changer, this will beactivated as soon as the first dispensing operation is at an end.

– To activate the parameters, press <F4>, select “Yes” in the mask thatappears and then press <F4> again: The same mask as describedunder Pump (1) appears.Selecting the solvent also defines the ST20A output to which you mustattach the second pump (see Section 2.8).

Rinse You have installed a rinsing unit in the titration head and attached a pumpto the sample changer to rinse the sensor and burette tip after everytitration.

– Press <F4> to activate the parameter, select "Yes" in the mask thatappears and press <F4> again:

Rinse METHOD

Solvent H2OVolume [mL] 10

Esc Modify OK

Sample

– Select the solvent from the list (press <F4>) which contains thesolvents you have defined in the Setup menu. Selecting this solventalso defines the ST20A output to which you must attach the pump (seeSection 2.8).

– Enter the volume which should be dispensed.

Note: If you run sample series in succession on the sample changer(possible only with DL55/DL58) and the titrator has titrated the lastsample of the last method, the sensor and burette tip are rinsed inthe middle beaker position. The sample beaker is then raised toensure the sensor does not dry out, in other words it remains in thesample solution.To prevent this, you must insert a conditioning beaker after the lastsample beaker.


Method

– Enter the time for conditioning.

– Enter the Interval (number of samples), e.g. 3, in other words,conditioning must be performed after every third sample.

– If the sensor and burette tip have to be rinsed after the conditioning,select Rinse and define the solvent and volume for this rinsingoperation (see page 3-14).

Notes

The following are defined (example): 10 s, 3 as interval and rinse 10 swith H2O:

1. The ST20A conditions with the defined parameters if you place aconditioning beaker after every 3rd sample beaker (always markconditioning beakers with red stopper plugs!)

2. The ST20A conditions and rinses with the defined parameters if itdetects a conditioning beaker after a sample beaker.

3. If the ST20A does not detect a conditioning beaker after the 3rdsample beaker, it searches for one by rotating backward. It thenconditions for 10 s, but does not perform rinsing to avoid overflow ofthe beaker contents.

4. After the last sample of a series, the time and rinse parameters are notexecuted anymore.

S3 CS2S1 CS6S5S4 S9S8S7 C

Conditioning You must activate this parameter if you wish to condition the sensor:

– Press <F4>, select "Yes" in the mask that appears then press <F4>again:

Sample

Conditioning METHOD

Time [s] 10Interval 1Rinse No

Esc OK

S3CS2S1 CS6S5S4C S8S7 S9

S3C S2S1 CS6S5S4 S8S7 S9


Method

Speed •0 % → The stirrer is at a standstill;•100% → The stirrer stirs at maximum speed.The speed you define applies to all following functions up to the nextStir function.However, you can also change the speed during a titration (see Section6.2).

Time • "0" means that the titrator does not wait at all,• "10" means that it waits 10 s before it starts the next function: It then

stirs at the defined speed. The remaining stirring time appears in thedisplay.

3.3.3 Stir

You can modify the stirring speed and stirring and wait times.

Stir METHOD

Speed [%] 50Time [s] 10

Esc OK

Stir


Method

Fix: Press <F4> to show the mask in which you can modify t(min).

E greater than set value:

3.3.4 Measure

You measure the potential of a solution under defined conditions. The titrator determines themeasured value as raw result E (see note 2 at the end of this section).

Sensor DG111

Unit of meas. mV

∆E [mV] 0.5

∆t [s] 1.0

t(min) mode Fix

t(max) [s] 30

Sensor Press <F4> to open the list containing the sensors you have defined inthe Setup menu (see Section 2.2). Confirm the one you want with OK.

Unit of measure- The defined measurement unit is entered automatically.ment If you select the unit from the selection menu, you should select mV or the

unit defined in the Setup menu, otherwise you will receive an errormessage when the method is started.

∆E [mV] The drift of the electrode potential must be less than ∆E/∆t (0.5 mV/s)during the period ∆t (1 s) for the measured value to be acquired. Thishappens within a defined time span t(min) and t(max). (See diagram inSection 3.3.6.4: Equilibrium controlled measure mode).

t(min) mode t(min) is the earliest time for measured value acquisition. Select t(min)from the selection menu:

∆t [s]

Measure

t(min) mode METHOD

FixE > set valueE < set value Esc Modify

E less than set value:

Instead of a fixed time, you can enter a condi-tion: The measured value must be greater orless than a certain set value: Press <F4> toshow the mask in which you enter the set value[mV, pH, ...].


Method

t(max) [s] t(max) is the latest time for measured value acquisition.

If you have selected one of the conditions for t(min), the titrator starts thenext function only when the measured potential E is greater or less thanthe set value and the drift condition is met, but at the latest after t(max).

Notes

1. If you have selected a temperature sensor under the Sample function, the temperature ofthe sample solution is measured automatically before the titrator executes this function. Ifyou have not attached a sensor (parameter "Manual"), the titrator adopts the temperatureentered at the start of the method. The slope of the pH electrode is temperature-correctedby this measured or entered value and incorporated in the calculation of the pH value.

2. The Measure, Dispense, EQP/EP/EQP (Ipol/Upol)/EP (Ipol/Upol)/EP/Learn titration andpH/mV-stat functions generate Raw results (see Section 8.1: List of symbols). These youcan• print out as such on the attached printer (see Sections 3.3.16 and 8.1.1 for exceptions).• incorporate in the calculation (see Examples of formulas: Section 8.4).• obtain as a result if you assign them to the result R: e.g. R = E (see Section 3.3.12).

At the end of a titration, you obtain only the final results in the display of the titrator, the rawresults you can only print out.

The titrator stores raw results up to the determination of the next sample within a sampleseries (see Section 8.5.6).

Measure


Method

3.3.5 Dispense

You dispense a certain volume of a titrant with a METTLER TOLEDO burette. The titratordetermines the dispensed volume as the raw result VDISP [mL] or QDISP [mmol] (see Section8.1: List of symbols and Section 3.3.4: Measure function).

Dispense METHOD

Titrant NaOHConcentration [mol/L] 0.1Volume [mL] 1.0 Esc Modify OK

Titrant Press <F4> to open the list containing the titrants you have defined in theSetup menu (see Section 2.1). Confirm the one you want with OK.

Concentration The defined concentration of the titrant is entered automatically.

Volume Enter the volume to be dispensed. Instead of a number, you can enter aformula.

Note: If you do not need the Dispense function in the method, enter 0 for the volume: Thefunction will then be skipped during the analysis.

Dispense


Method

3.3.6 EQP titration (equivalence point titration)

Here you define the control and evaluation of an equivalence point titration. The equivalencepoint is that point at which exactly the same number of equivalents of titrant and analyte havereacted. In most cases, it is virtually identical to the inflection point of the titration curve. Thisinflection point is recognized and the equivalence point calculated.

Titrant/Sensor

Predispensing

Titrant addition

Measure mode

Recognition

Termination

Evaluation

The titrator determines several measured values and volumes as raw results including the halfneutralization value EHNV (see Section 8.1: List of symbols and Section 3.3.4: Measurefunction).

Note: If you have selected a temperature sensor under the Sample function, the temperatureof the sample solution is measured automatically before the titrator executes thisfunction. If you have not attached a sensor (parameter "Manual"), the titrator adopts thetemperature entered at the start of the method. The slope of the pH electrode istemperature-corrected by this measured or entered value and incorporated in thecalculation of the pH value.

3.3.6.1 Titrant/Sensor

To modify the titrant or sensor, press <F4>:

Titrant NaOH


Sensor DG111

Unit of meas. mV



EQP titration


Method

Sensor Press <F4> to open the list containing the sensors you have defined inthe Setup menu (see Section 2.2.). Confirm the one you want with OK.



3.3.6.2 Predispensing

Predispensing shortens the titration time. You can select one of four predispensing modeswhen you press <F4>.

to volume

to potential

to slope

to (factor x sample size)

No

Volume You dispense a specified volume [mL] which you can enter when youpress <F4>. Instead of a number, you can enter a formula.You can also enter a wait time: After the predispensing, the titrator waitsfor this time to elapse before it adds the titrant in a controlled manner.

Potential You dispense to a specified potential [mV, pH, ....] that you can enterwhen you press <F4>.

Slope You dispense to a specified slope [mV, pH, ..../mL] of the titration curve;this you can enter when you press <F4>.

Factor x You dispense to a specified volume that is calculated from the product ofthe sample weight or volume and a factor; you can enter this factor whenyou press <F4>.You can also enter a wait time (see “Volume”).

No You do not wish to predispense.

In predispensing to volumes or (sample size x factor), the titrator adds the titrant in three steps(4/7, 2/7, 1/7 of the defined volume), which allows optimum calculation of the additionincrement in the subsequent dynamic titration. In the predispensing to potential or slope, thetitrant addition follows the selected parameters of the main titration, but the increments arelarger.

EQP titration: Predispensing

sample size


Method

The titrator acquires the potential values ET1 and ET2 in the predispensing.

Dynamic METHOD

∆E(set) [mV] 8.0∆V(min) [mL] 0.02∆V(max) [mL] 0.15

Esc Help OK

You can not decide what addition mode is optimum for your method until you know the titrationcurve. You can obtain general information by pressing <F3>:

• You generally select the dynamic addition mode for acid/base titrations in aqueous mediaor for argentometric and redox titrations,

• the incremental for acid/base titrations in nonaqueous media or for complexometric, redoxand surfactant titrations.

Dynamic The volume increment added by the titrator changes within the definedsmallest and largest increment: ∆V(min) and ∆V(max). This should leadto a constant potential difference ∆E per increment.

Titrant addition METHOD

Dynamic

Incremental

Esc Info Modify

EQP titration: Titrant addition

3.3.6.3 Titrant addition

You select the dynamic or incremental addition mode:

ET1: Potential at the start of predis-pensing or the titration

ET2: Potential after predispensing

Predispensing toa: Volume or

(factor x sample size)b: Potentialc: Slope


Method

If no predispensing takes place, the titrator dispenses the first two volumeincrements with ∆V(min).

HelpIf you press <F3>, you can adopt the values for all three parameters fromthe mask that appears. With the proposed value groups, sufficientmeasured points in the vicinity of the equivalence point should begenerated to optimize its evaluation:• For steep titration curves, a value for ∆E must be selected which is

smaller than for flat titration curves, e.g. 8 mV.• For titration curves which show a sudden potential change, small

values for ∆E and ∆V(max) should be selected, e.g. 4 mV.

∆E3

∆E4

∆E ~ ∆E(soll)

∆E5

E [mV]

V [mL]∆V3 ∆V4

Dynamic

V [mL]

E [mV]

steep curve

flat curve

curve with suddenpotential jump


∆E ~ ∆E(set)


Method

Dynamic Note: The smallest increment that the titrator can dispense is 1/5000 ofthe burette volume:1 mL burette → 0.0002 mL 5 mL burette → 0.001 mL

10 mL burette → 0.002 mL 20 mL burette → 0.004 mL

Incremental The volume increment added by the titrator is constant.

∆V12 ∆V14

∆E14

∆E13

∆E12

E [mV]

V [mL]

Help

If you press <F3>, you can adopt a value for ∆V from the mask thatappears. The proposed values are intended to achieve the same goal asin the dynamic titrant addition: sufficient measured points in the vicinity ofthe equivalence point to optimize its evaluation:

• For steep titration curves, a smaller ∆V must be selected than for flatcurves to ensure there are sufficient measured points at the equiva-lence point.

• For titration curves which exhibit a sudden potential change, a small ∆Vshould be selected.


Incremental METHOD

∆V [mL] 0.3

Esc Help OK


Method

These parameters are used to define the wait time up to measured value acquisition followingan incremental addition. In the equilibrium controlled measure mode, the wait time is variable,in the timed increment it is constant. You can not decide the optimum measure mode for yourmethod until you know the reaction time of the components and the response time of the sensorused. General information is available under <F3>:

• Select the equilibrium controlled measure mode for, e.g. acid/base titrations in aqueousmedia, argentometric, complexometric, surfactant and redox titrations.

• the timed increment mode for acid/base titrations in nonaqueous media.

∆E [mV] 0.5

∆t [s] 1.0

t(min) [s] 3.0

t(max) [s] 30.0

Before the titrator adds the next increment, an equilibrium must beestablished in the solution; the measured value must stabilize.

The following are responsible for the equilibrium• the potential change ∆E measured in the solution

within the defined time ∆t.

The wait time up to the next increment addition also depends on thedefinition of the• minimum time t(min) and

the maximum time t(max)

As soon as the potential change of the solution is less than the definedequilibrium (∆E/∆t), the titrator acquires the measured value and adds thenext increment.

This can be at t(min) at the earliest and should be at t(max) at the latest.At t(max) the measured value is in any case acquired, even if theequilibrium condition is not yet met.

3.3.6.4 Measure mode

You select the equilibrium controlled or timed increment measured value acquisition:

Measure mode METHOD

Equilibrium controlled

Timed increment

Esc Info Modify

Equilibriumcontrolled

EQP titration: Measure mode


Method


a: The defined equilibrium condition is not yet met.t(min): The equilibrium condition is not met after 3 s.b: The equilibrium condition is met for the first time after 5.4 or 6.9 s.

This measure mode results in fast increment addition in the flat part of thetitration curve and slow addition in the steep part.

In addition to the potential, the titrator acquires the time and the titrantvolume. You can print out these measured values after the titration of asample (see Section 3.3.16: Report).

HelpWhen you press <F3>, you can adopt suggested values for all fourparameters from the mask that appears:• Fast titrations are, e.g. acid/base titrations in aqueous media,• slow titrations, e.g. precipitation titrations in nonaqueous media.


t [s]

1 5t(min)

E [mV]

0 1 t(min) 5

Increment addtion

163

162

161

160

159

158

157

156

155

154

153

152

151

∆t = 2 s

∆E = 1 mV

Increment addition

∆t = 2 s

∆E = 1 mV

7

164

0

a

t(min)

b

a

t(min)

b


Method

Timed increment After every increment addition, the titrator allows the time you havedefined to elapse before it acquires the measured value.

Timed increment METHOD

∆t [s] 3.0

Esc Help OK

HelpWhen you press <F3>, you can adopt suggested values for the timeinterval from the mask that appears:

• Enter small time intervals for, e.g. acid/base titrations in aqueousmedia,

• large intervals for, e.g. precipitation titrations in nonaqueous media,

• 90 seconds for, e.g. TAN/TBN titrations of oils.


E [mV]

t [s]

∆t1 = 3 s ∆t2 = 3 s ∆t3 = 3 s

Measured value

Measured values

Increment addition

Increment addtionIncrement addition


Method

3.3.6.5 Recognition

Recognition of the equivalence point of a titration curve depends on the type of reaction of thecomponents and hence on the evaluation procedure (see Section 3.3.6.7):

1. With the evaluation procedures Maximum and Minimum, an equivalence point is recog-nized when the greatest (smallest) potential value of the titration curve is greater (less) thantwo preceding and two subsequent values.

2. With the evaluation procedures Standard and Asymmetric, an equivalence point is recog-nized when the maximum of the absolute values of the 1st derivative of the titration curveis greater than two preceding and two subsequent values.

3. With the evaluation procedure Segmented, an equivalence point is recognized when themaximum of the absolute values of the 2nd derivative of the titration curve is greater thantwo preceding and two subsequent values.

Note: For the first recognition of a possible equivalence point, the titrator needs a certainnumber of measured points.

• The number depends on the evaluation procedure.

• Measured points of a predispensing are not taken into account!

Evaluation procedure First possible EQP Required numberat of measured points

Minimum/Maximum 4th measured point 6

Standard 4th measured point 6

Asymmetric 4th measured point 10

Segmented 5th measured point 8

Example illustrating the evaluation procedure Minimum: If the lowest potential value isfound at the third measured point, it is not recognized as an equivalence point.

You must or can support the equivalence point recognition using four parameters:

Threshold 10.0

Steepest jump only No

Range No

Tendency None

EQP titration: Recognition


Method

Threshold To ensure that minor disturbances in the curve profile are not recognizedas equivalence points, you must determine a threshold value:+/-E, ∆E/∆V or ∆2E/∆V2. This must be exceeded.

Notes

1. The threshold value should be maximum half as large as the expectedmaximum value of the first or second derivative at the equivalencepoint.

2. The threshold value depends on so many factors (solvent, concentra-tion, sensor, type of reaction, etc.) that you can not define the "correct"threshold value until you have performed the first titration.

InfoYou can obtain general information on threshold values in the stan-dard evaluation if you press <F3>:

• For steep, normal and flat titration curves, ranges of thresholdvalues are given for the first derivative in "pH/mL" and "mV/mL".

With the other evaluation procedures, you can enter one of the follow-ing values for the first titration:

Evaluation procedure mV pH/pM/pX %T

Minimum/Maximum 0 0 0

Asymmetric 10 0.2 1

Segmented 10 0.2 1

Using the corresponding titration curve or the table of measuredvalues (there is no table for the 2nd derivative), you can read off thepotential value, the values for ∆E/∆V or the values for ∆2E/∆V2 andthen enter the threshold value.



Method

Threshold Example of threshold value of a titration curve for the evaluation procedure Minimum

Example of threshold value of a titration curve for the evaluation procedures Standardand Asymmetric

The minimum of this titration curve liesat -150 mV. You can enter, for exam-ple, -30 as the threshold value. Thesign for the mV value must be entered.


V [mL]

-100

0Threshold value

Minimum

E [mV]

-30

+100

E [mV]

∆∆∆∆E/∆∆∆∆V [mV/mL]

V [mL]

1st derivative

Threshold value

Maximum (absolute)

Measured value

V [mL]

Titration curve


Method

Threshold Example of threshold value of a titration curve for the evaluation procedure Segmented

EQ titration: Recognition

Steepest jump You can also select this parameter for recognition of the equivalencepoint (press <F4>): The titrator then recognizes only the steepest jump ofthe titration curve.

only

V [mL]

Maximum (absolute)

Measured value

∆∆∆∆E/∆∆∆∆V [mV/mL]

V [mL]

V [mL]

E [mV]

Threshold value

Titration curve

1st derivative

2nd derivative ∆∆∆∆2E/∆∆∆∆V2 [mV/mL2]


Method

Range You can also define a potential range for recognition of the equivalencepoint. Equivalence points which lie outside this range are not recognized.

– Press <F4>, select "Yes" in the mask that appears and then press <F4>again:


Range METHOD

Limit A [mV,pH,..] 100

Limit B [mV,pH,..] -100

Esc OK

Instead of a number, you can also enter a potential stored as an auxiliaryvalue or a formula.

The equivalence point range always refers to the titration curve, in otherwords it is independent of the evaluation procedure.

Tendency As a further aid in recognition of the equivalence point, you can define thetendency, namely in what part of the titration curve – descending orascending – the equivalence point should be located (see diagram).

– Use <F4> to select the tendency: "None", "Positive" or "Negative".

Example illustrating selection of a range and positive tendency. Equivalence pointswhich lie outside this range and which do not have the right tendency are ignored.

Notice: A positive mV change means a negative pH change!

E [mV]

V [mL]

EQP

Limit A = +200

Limit B = +100

0

Tendenz: positivTendency: positive


Method

3.3.6.6 Termination

You can define how a titration should be terminated by selection of five different parameters.The titrator can terminate the titration either

• when the first of the selected conditions is met, or

• when all the selected conditions are met.

• An exception is the maximum volume: when this is reached, the titration is immediatelyterminated!

at maximum volume [mL] 10.0

at potential No

at slope No

after number EQPs No

comb. termination conditions No

Maximum volume You must enter the maximum volume. It is intended as a safety precau-tion: if the titration is faulty, an excessive amount of titrant is not dis-pensed unnecessarily as the titration is always terminated.

Potential The titrator terminates the titration at the defined potential.


At potential METHOD

Potential [mV,pH,..] 0.0

Esc OK


Slope The titrator terminates the titration when the slope of the titration curve isless than a certain value. The measured slope must exceed this absolutevalue once and drop below it twice to terminate the titration.

– Press <F4>, select "Yes" and press <F4> again: Enter the slope [mV,pH,.../mL] in the mask that appears.

EQP titration: Termination


Method

Number EQPs The titrator terminates the titration after a certain number n of equivalencepoints has been found.

– Press <F4>, select "Yes" and press <F4> again: Enter the number inthe mask that appears.

Comb. terminate- The titrator does not terminate the titration until all defined terminationconditions are met (exception: maximum volume, see above).

– Select "Yes" with <F4>.

3.3.6.7 Evaluation

You determine which evaluation procedure is used to calculate the equivalence points foundand select potential values you wish to have evaluated.

Procedure Standard

Potential 1 No

Potential 2 No

Stop for reevaluation No

Procedure Use <F4> to select the procedure among several calculation modeswhich matches the titration curve (see Section 8.3).

Standard Evaluation procedure for all S-shaped titration curves

Minimum Determination of the minimum of a titration curve

Maximum Determination of the maximum of a titration curve

Segmented Evaluation procedure for titration curves with segments(segmented curve)

Asymmetric Evaluation procedure for S-shaped, highly asymmetrictitration curves.

Note: If an evaluation is not possible with the standard procedure, theequivalence point is calculated by interpolation (see Section 8.3.1).If an evaluation is not possible with the asymmetric procedure, theequivalence point is calculated by the standard procedure or byinterpolation (see Section 8.3.4).In both cases, the evaluation procedure will be documented foreach sample in the “raw results” report if it differs from the definedprocedure. If you have to work according to GLP guidelines, youshould therefore always record the raw results (see Section3.3.16).

EQP titration: Evaluation

tion criteria


Method

The condition "neq = 0" means that the EQP titration function is interrupt-ed immediately before its completion if no equivalence point has beenfound.

Potential 1 In the selection of potentials, the titrator evaluates not only the equiva-lence points, but also the titrant consumption in mmol or mL required forattainment of these potential values (see Section 8.1: List of symbols).

– Press <F4>, select "Yes" and press <F4> again: Enter the first potential[mV, pH,...] in the mask that appears.Instead of a number, you can also enter a potential stored as anauxiliary value or a formula (see Section 2.5: Auxiliary values).

Potential 2 If you wish to have a second potential evaluated, proceed as describedfor potential 1.

Notes for Potential 1/2

1. If you have selected potential 1 and/or 2, the titrator does not test alltermination conditions– except maximum volume – until the potentialsare reached (see Section 3.3.6.6).

2. When you select the two potentials, you also define the tendency(from P1 to P2) and the order: If the titrator finds P2 first, it will no longersearch for P1.

Stop for The EQP titration function is interrupted immediately before its comple-tion if the termination conditions and the condition defined here are met.This allows you to modify parameters of the equivalence point recognition(all) and the evaluation (potential 1 and 2). All evaluations are performedagain using the modified parameters (see Section 5.2.2).


EQP titration: Evaluation

reevaluation

Reevaluation METHOD

Condition neq=0

Esc Symbol Modify OK


Method

Stop for ModifyUse <F4> to select a different condition in the list that appears:neq > 1: If more than one,neq < 2: less than two, or3 > neq > 0: one or two equivalence points are found,

the titration will always be interrupted.

Symbol

Press <F3> to show the list of symbols (see Section 8.1). You can selectsymbols from this list to define your own condition, e.g. VEQ > 0.6:- Select "neq > 1" (under "Modify" command)- delete "neq"- select "VEQ" from the symbol list- then position cursor on "1" and replace by "0.6".

reevaluation


Method

3.3.7 EP titration (end point titration)

Here you define the control and evaluation of an end point titration and thus titrate to a particularvalue of the selected measurement unit.

Before an end point titration to a particular pH value, you should calibrate the pHelectrode used!

Titrant/Sensor

Predispensing

Titrant addition

End point

Tendency

Termination

The titrator determines several measured values and volumes as raw results (see Section 8.1:List of symbols and Section 3.3.4: Measure function).

Note: If you have selected a temperature sensor under the Sample function, the temperatureof the sample solution is measured automatically before the titrator executes thisfunction. If you have not attached a sensor (parameter "Manual"), the titrator adopts thetemperature entered at the start of the method. The slope of the pH electrode istemperature-corrected by this measured or entered value and incorporated in thecalculation of the pH value.



Titrant NaOH


Sensor DG111

Unit of meas. mV




EP titration

NOTICE


Method

Volume You dispense to a specified volume [mL] that you can enter when youpress <F4>. Instead of a number, you can enter a formula.You can also enter a wait time: After the predispensing, the titrator waitsfor this time to elapse before it adds the titrant in a controlled manner.

Factor x You dispense to a specified volume that is calculated from the product ofthe sample weight or volume and a factor; you can enter this factor if youpress <F4>.You can also enter a wait time (see “Volume”).


In the subsequent continuous titrant addition, the titrator dispenses the volume in one step. Itacquires the potential values ET1 and ET2 (see Section 3.3.6.2).

In the subsequent dynamic titrant addition, it dispenses the volume in three steps (4/ 7, 2/ 7,1/ 7 of the defined volume), which allows optimum calculation of the addition increment. Itacquires the potential values ET1 and ET2.

Unit of measure- The defined unit of measurement is entered automatically.ment When you select the unit from the selection menu, you should select mV

or the unit defined in the Setup menu, otherwise you will receive an errormessage when the method is started.


Predispensing shortens the titration time. You can select one or two predispensing modeswhen you press <F4>.

EP titration: Predispensing

Predispensing METHOD

to volumeto (factor x sample size)No

Esc Modify

sample size


Method

Press <F3> for general information on what addition mode you should select:

• In general, select the dynamic addition mode for acid/base titrations in aqueous media,argentometric and redox titrations,

• the continuous mode for acid/base titrations in nonaqueous media.

Dynamic For dynamic titrant addition in the EP titration, the same conditions applyas in dynamic addition in the EQP titration (see Section 3.3.6.3). Themeasured values are acquired with equilibrium control as in the EQPtitration (see Section 3.3.6.4).

∆E(set) [mV] 8.0

∆V(min) [mL] 0.02

∆V(max) [mL] 0.15

∆E [mV] 1.0

∆t [s] 1.0

t(min) [s] 2.0

t(max) [s] 10.0

Help (titrant addition)

If you have selected the first three parameters and press <F3>, you canadopt suggested values for the dynamic addition from the mask thatappears.• For steep titration curves, a smaller value of ∆E must be selected than

for flat titration curves.• For titration curves that exhibit a sudden jump, small values for ∆E and∆V(max) should be selected.

In the absence of predispensing, the titrator dispenses the first twovolume increments with ∆V(min).

EP titration: Titrant addition


You can select a dynamic or continuous addition mode:


Dynamic

Continuous

Esc Info Modify

equilibriumcontrolledmeasured valueacquisition

dynamictitrant addition


Method

Dynamic Help (measured value acquisition)

If you have selected one of the last four parameters and press <F3>, youcan adopt suggested values for the equilibrium condition from the maskthat appears:• Fast titrations are, e.g. acid/base titrations in aqueous media,• slow titrations are, e.g. precipitation titrations in nonaqueous media.

The equilibrium conditions apply only in the end point range defined bythe following formula:

EP range = EP ± 1.5 * ∆E(set).Example: If the end point is -30 mV, the condition holds for above values

of -15 to -45 mV.Outside this range: ∆E (outside) = 4 * ∆E holds.If the end point is reached: ∆E = ∆E/2 holds.

Continuous

The titrator dispenses the titrant slowly at the start then at the maximumrate until the defined control band. Within the control range, the dispens-ing rate decreases exponentially. In the vicinity of the end point, thetitrator adds the increment ∆V(min) (the smallest increment that thetitrator can dispense is 1/5 000 of the burette volume).

EP titration: Titrant addition

Continuous METHOD

Control band [mV, pH,...] 100.0

∆V(min) [mL] 0.01

Esc Help OK

E [mV, pH]

V [mL]

+100

-100 End point

Control band = 250 mV

8

7

6

5

4

Start of the control range

+200

0

(4.3 pH)


Method

Continuous HelpWhen you press <F3> you can adopt suggested values for the continuousaddition from the mask that appears (confirm with OK).• For titration curves with a steep control range, the control band must be

larger than that for the flat control range.For ∆V(min) you can enter a formula instead of a number.

The titrator measures the initial potential ET1 after 1 - 3 seconds and forthe table of measured values it acquires a measured value every 5seconds.

3.3.7.4 End point

You have a choice between two end point titrations.

EP titration: End point

End point METHOD

EP absolute

EP relative

Esc Modify

EP absolute The absolute end point is the value on the electrode signal scale referredto zero.– Press <F4> and enter the potential [mV, pH, ...] in the mask that

appears.Instead of a number, you can enter a formula or call up a potential storedas an auxiliary value.Example: You have stored the value of "EPOT" of H3PO4 for the 1st

equivalence point as H4. If you wish to titrate to this potential,enter H4.

EP relative The relative end point is the difference between the electrode signal at thestart of the titration and that at the end.– Press <F4> and enter the potential [mV, pH, ...] in the mask that

appears.


Method

3.3.7.5 Tendency

A titration exhibits a positive or negative mV or pH change (see diagram). You have to definethis.

– Press <F4> and select "Positive" or "Negative" in the mask that appears (press <F4>).

A positive mV change means a negative pH change!

EP titration: Tendency/Termination

3.3.7.6 Termination

You define the termination of a titration by selecting two parameters.

Termination METHOD

Maximum volume [mL] 10.0Delay [s] 10

Esc OK

Maximum volume You must define the volume. It is intended as a safety precaution: if thetitration is faulty, an excess amount of titrant is not added unnecessarily.

Delay is the time from attainment of the end point up to definitive termination ofthe titration. If the measured value of the end point decreases within thespecified time, the titrator adds additional increments.

E [mV – pH]

V [mL]

300

200

100

0

8

7

6

5

4

3

Start potential

End potential

EP relative = 310 mV (pH 5.2)

EP absolute = - 30 mV (pH 7.5)

Tendency positive (mV)negative (pH)

Tendency negative (mV)positive (pH)+

+

+

NOTICE


Method

3.3.8 Learn titration

If you are not sure what parameters you should enter for the titration function, select thestandard method Learn titration and define the parameters for the titrant and sensor under theLearn titration function.

Note: The titrator always titrates the entire volume of the burette used. You thus have to selectweight/volume of your sample in accordance with the burette volume.

Learn titration


Titrant NaOH


Sensor DG111

Unit of meas. mV





unit defined in the Setup menu. Otherwise you will receive an errormessage when the method is started.

When you start the method, the titrator executes one function after another. As soon as it hascompleted the Learn titration function, it calculates the parameters from the responsebehavior of the sensor, the shape of the titration curve and with consideration of the burettevolume.

It stores these as an EQP titration function and sends the data to the printer. While the dataare being printed, the titrator executes the remaining functions: The "Learn titration" has givenrise to an equivalence point titration!

Learn titration METHOD

Titrant/Sensor

Esc Modify OK


Method

Printout of a learned EQP titration (example: acid determination with NaOH)

LEARN TITRATION

Method 12 Learn titrationVersion 28-Oct-1996 14:36

EQP titrationTitrant/Sensor

Titrant ............................... NaOHConcentration [mol/L] ................. 0.1Sensor ................................ DG111Unit of meas. ......................... pH

Predispensing ............................. to volumeVolume [mL] ........................... 1.0Wait time [s] ......................... 0

Titrant addition .......................... Dynamic∆E(set) [mV] .......................... 12.0∆V(min) [mL] .......................... 0.08∆V(max [mL] ........................... 0.4

Measure mode .............................. Equilibrium controlled∆E [mV] ............................... 1.0∆t [s] ............................... 1.0t(min) [s] ............................ 2.0t(max) [s] ............................ 20.0

RecognitionThreshold ............................. 2.0Steepest jump only .................... NoRange ............................... NoTendency .............................. None

Terminationat maximum volume [mL] ................ 10.0at potential .......................... Noat slope .............................. Noafter number EQPs ..................... Yes

n = ................................ 1comb. termination conditions .......... No

EvaluationProcedure ............................. StandardPotential 1 ........................... NoPotential 2 ........................... NoStop for reevaluation ................. No

• If the titrator finds more than one equivalence point, it calculates the parameters for the onewith the steepest jump.

• If the titrator does not find any equivalence points, it interrupts the method and an errormessage appears (see Section 5.2.2).

• The titrator first recognizes a possible equivalence point when this lies at the sixth measuredpoint (see Section 3.3.6.5).

• As an EQP titration emerges immediately from the Learn titration function, you can titrate aseries of samples with the same content. If you have selected "Statistics" under the Calcu-lation function, the result of the first sample will then be discarded!

Learn titration


Method




Titrant/Sensor METHOD

Titrant 1/2 I2Concentration [mol/L] 0.1Sensor DM142

Esc Modify OK


3.3.9 EQP titration (Ipol/Upol)

Here you define the control and evaluation of a voltametric or amperometric equivalence pointtitration. The equivalence point is that point at which exactly the same number of equivalentsof titrant and analyte have reacted. In most cases, it is virtually identical to the inflection pointof the titration curve. This inflection point is recognized and the equivalence point calculated.

Titrant/Sensor

Indication

Predispensing

Titrant addition

Measure mode

Recognition

Termination

Evaluation





Method

3.3.9.2 Indication

To select the voltametric or amperometric indication, press <F4>:

Indication METHOD

VoltametricAmperometric

Esc Modify

Voltametric The potential difference between two metal electrodes is measured bypolarizing them with a constant current (in the case of the DM142 elec-trode, the two pins of the platinum electrode are polarized).

– Press <F4> to enter the current Ipol. Its value depends among otherthings on:• the electrode itself (e.g. distance between the platinum pins in the

case of the DM142 electrode)• the dissolved substance to be determined and its concentration• the solvent• the reaction with the titrant.

You can obtain an initial starting point for the current intensity to beselected by measuring the corresponding solutions with different currentintensities (see Section 6.1.4) and recording the voltage value. Thisshould lie within the measurement range ±1500 mV for both the initialand the equivalence point potential (see Section 12.1: Technical Data).

Example of a vitamin C determination in a multivitamin drinkwith DPI [0.01 mol/L]

E [mV]

V [mL]

EQP titration (Ipol/Upol): Indication


Method

Amperometric The potential difference between two metal electrodes is measured bypolarizing them with a constant voltage (in the case of the DM142 elec-trode, the two pins of the platinum electrode are polarized).

– Press <F4> to enter the voltage Upol. Its value depends on the samefactors mentioned under the parameter "Voltametric".

You can obtain an initial starting point for the voltage to be selected bymeasuring the corresponding solutions with different voltage values (seeSection 6.1.4) and recording the current intensity. This should lie withinthe measurement range ±150 µA for both the initial and the equivalencepoint potential (see Section 12.1: Technical Data).

E [µA]

V [mL]

Note: Higher current or voltage values result in higher jumps (a steeper curve) in the equi-valence point region, however the platinum pins of the electrode become contaminatedquicker.

Example of a vitamin C determination in a multivitamin drinkwith DPI [0.01 mol/L]

EQP titration (Ipol/Upol): Indication


MethodEQP titration (Ipol/Upol): Predispensing/Titrant addition

∆E ~ ∆E(set)


Predispensing shortens the titration time. You can select one of two predispensing modeswhen you press <F4>.


to volumeto (factor x sample size)No Esc Change

Volume You dispense a specified volume [mL] which you can enter when youpress <F4>. Instead of a number, you can enter a formula.You can also enter a wait time: After the predispensing, the titrator waitsfor this time to elapse before it adds the titrant in a controlled manner.

Factor x You dispense to a specified volume that is calculated from the product ofthe sample weight or volume and a factor; you can enter this factor whenyou press <F4>.You can also enter a wait time (see “Volume”).


In predispensing to volumes or (sample size x factor), the titrator adds the titrant in three steps(4/7, 2/7, 1/7 of the defined volume).


You can enter only a constant increment for the volume (see Section 3.3.6.3: Incrementaltitrant addition):

sample size


∆V [mL] 0.05

Esc OK


Method

These parameters are used to define the wait time up to measured value acquisition followingan incremental addition. In the equilibrium controlled measure mode, the wait time is variable,in the timed increment it is constant. You can not decide the optimum measure mode for yourmethod until you know the reaction time of the components and the response time of the sensorused.

∆E [mV, µA] 0.5

∆t [s] 1.0

t(min) [s] 3.0

t(max) [s] 30.0

Before the titrator adds the next increment, an equilibrium must beestablished in the solution; the measured value must stabilize.

The following are responsible for the equilibrium• the potential change ∆E measured in the solution

within the defined time ∆t.

The wait time up to the next increment addition also depends on thedefinition of the• minimum time t(min) and

the maximum time t(max)

As soon as the potential change of the solution is less than the definedequilibrium (∆E/∆t), the titrator acquires the measured value and adds thenext increment.

This can be at t(min) at the earliest and should be at t(max) at the latest.At t(max) the measured value is in any case acquired, even if the equi-librium condition is not yet met (see diagram in Section 3.3.6.4).

This measure mode results in fast increment addition in the flat part of thetitration curve and slow addition in the steep part.

Measure mode METHOD

Equilibrium controlled

Timed increment

Esc Modify



You select the equilibrium controlled or timed increment measured value acquisition:

EQP titration (Ipol/Upol): Measure mode


Method

Timed increment METHOD

∆t [s] 3.0

Esc OK

Timed increment After every increment addition, the titrator allows the time you havedefined to elapse before it acquires the measured value (see diagram inSection 3.3.6.4).

For both measure modes, the titrator acquires the potential, the time and the titrant volume.You can print out these measured values after the titration of a sample (see Section 3.3.16:Report).

3.3.9.6 Recognition

Recognition of the equivalence point of a titration curve depends on the type of reaction of thecomponents and hence on the evaluation procedure (see Section 3.3.9.8):

1. With the evaluation procedures Maximum and Minimum, an equivalence point is recog-nized when the greatest (smallest) potential value of the titration curve is greater (less) thantwo preceding and two subsequent values.

2. With the evaluation procedures Standard and Asymmetric an equivalence point is recog-nized when the maximum of the absolute values of the 1st derivative of the titration curveis greater than two preceding and two subsequent values.

3. With the evaluation procedure Segmented, an equivalence point is recognized when themaximum of the absolute values of the 2nd derivative of the titration curve is greater thantwo preceding and two subsequent values.

Note: For the first recognition of a possible equivalence point, the titrator needs a certain num-ber of measured points (see Section 3.3.6.5).

You must or can support the equivalence point recognition using four parameters:

Threshold 10.0


Range No

Tendency None

EQP titration (Ipol/Upol): Recognition


Method

Instead of a number, you can also enter a potential stored as an auxiliaryvalue or a formula.The equivalence point range always refers to the titration curve, in otherwords it is independent of the evaluation procedure.

Tendency As a further aid in recognition of the equivalence point, you can define thetendency, namely in what part of the titration curve – descending orascending – the equivalence point should be located (see diagram onpage 3-32).

– Use <F4> to select the tendency: "None", "Positive" or "Negative".

Threshold To ensure that minor disturbances in the curve profile are not recognizedas equivalence points, you must determine a threshold value:+/-E, ∆E/∆V oder ∆2E/∆V2. This must be exceeded.

Notes

1. The threshold value should be maximum half as large as the expectedmaximum value of the first or second derivative at the equivalencepoint.

2. The threshold value depends on so many factors (solvent, concentra-tion, sensor, type of reaction, etc.) that you can not define the "correct"threshold value until you have performed the first titration.

3. You will find examples of the threshold value for the different evalua-tion procedures in Section 3.3.6.5.

Steepest jump You can also select this parameter for recognition of the equivalencepoint (press <F4>): The titrator then recognizes only the steepest jump ofthe titration curve.

Range You can also define a potential range for recognition of the equivalencepoint. Equivalence points which lie outside this range are not recognized.

– Press <F4>, select "Yes" in the mask that appears and then press <F4>again:

only

Range METHOD

Limit A [mV, µA] 100Limit B [mV, µA] 200

Esc OK

EQP titration (Ipol/Upol): Recognition


Method

At potential METHOD

Potential [mV, µA] 0.0

Esc OK

3.3.9.7 Termination

You can define how a titration should be terminated by selection of five different parameters.The titrator can terminate the titration either

• when the first of the selected conditions is met, or

• when all the selected conditions are met.

• An exception is the maximum volume: when this is reached, the titration is immediatelyterminated!

at maximum volume [mL] 10.0

at potential No

at slope No

after number EQPs No

comb. termination conditions No

Maximum volume You must enter the maximum volume. It is intended as a safety precau-tion: if the titration is faulty, an excessive amount of titrant is not dis-pensed unnecessarily as the titration is always terminated.

Potential The titrator terminates the titration at the defined potential.



Slope The titrator terminates the titration when the slope of the titration curve isless than a certain value. The measured slope must exceed this absolutevalue once and drop below it twice to terminate the titration.

– Press <F4>, select "Yes" and press <F4> again: Enter the slope[mV/mL] or [µA/mL] in the mask that appears.

EQP titration (Ipol/Upol): Termination


Method

Number EQPs The titrator terminates the titration after a certain number n of equivalencepoints has been found.

– Press <F4>, select "Yes" and press <F4> again: Enter the number inthe mask that appears.

Comb. termina- The titrator does not terminate the titration until all defined terminationconditions are met (exception: maximum volume, see above).

– Select "Yes" with <F4>.

3.3.9.8 Evaluation

You determine which evaluation procedure is used to calculate the equivalence points foundand select potential values you wish to have evaluated.

Procedure Standard

Potential 1 No

Potential 2 No

Stop for reevaluation No

Procedure Use <F4> to select the procedure among several calculation modeswhich matches the titration curve (see Section 8.3).

Standard Evaluation procedure for all S-shaped titration curves;can be used for curves with steep jumps in titrations withvoltametric and amperometric indication.

Minimum Determination of the minimum of a titration curve

Maximum Determination of the maximum of a titration curve

Segmented Evaluation procedure for titration curves with segments(segmented curve); can be used for titrations with amper-ometric indication.

Asymmetric Evaluation procedure for S-shaped, highly asymmetrictitration curves.

EQP titration (Ipol/Upol): Evaluation

tion criteria


Method

E [µA]

V [mL]

E [mV]

V [mL]

E-V curve E-V curve

∆E/∆V-V curve

∆2E/∆V2-V curve

∆E/∆V-V curve

∆2E/∆V2-V curve

Procedure Notes

1. In an evaluation with the standard procedure is not possible, theequivalence point is calculated by interpolation (see Section 8.3.1).If an evaluation is not possible with the asymmetric procedure, theequivalence point is calculated by the standard procedure or byinterpolation (see Section 8.3.4).In both cases, the evaluation procedure will be documented for eachsample in the "raw results" report if it differs from the defined proce-dure. If you have to work according to GLP guidelines, you shouldtherefore always record the raw results (see Section 3.3.16).

2. If you determine the same sample with a voltametric and ampero-metric EQP titration, in many cases you must change not only theparameters of the indication, measured value acquisition and recog-nition, but also the evaluation procedure. An example is the vitamin Cdetermination in a multivitamin drink with DPI [0.01mol/L]:

Voltametric titration: Standard Amperometric titration: Segmented



Method

Potential 1 In the selection of potentials, the titrator evaluates not only the equiva-lence points, but also the titrant consumption in mmol or mL required forattainment of these potential values (see Section 8.1: List of symbols).

– Press <F4>, select "Yes" and press <F4> again: Enter the first potential[mV, µA] in the mask that appears.Instead of a number, you can also enter a potential stored as anauxiliary value or a formula (see Section 2.5: Auxiliary values).

Potential 2 If you wish to have a second potential evaluated, proceed as describedfor potential 1.

Notes for Potential 1/2

1. If you have selected potential 1 and/or 2, the titrator does not test alltermination conditions– except maximum volume – until the potentialsare reached (see Section 3.3.9.7).

2. When you select the two potentials, you also define the tendency(from P1 to P2) and the order: If the titrator finds P2 first, it will nolonger search for P1.

Stop for The EQP titration (Ipol/Upol) function is interrupted immediately beforeits completion if the termination conditions and the condition defined hereare met (see Section 3.3.6.7).

reevaluation

E [mV]

V [mL]

Procedure 3. If you obtain a so-called Z curve in an equivalence point determination(see diagram), we recommend performing an end point titration.


Example of a titer determination of iodine solution [0.1 mol/L]with L-ascorbic acid (vitamin C)


Method




EP titration (Ipol/Upol)

Titrant/Sensor METHOD

Titrant 1/2 I2Concentration [mol/L] 0.1Sensor DM142

Esc Modify OK

3.3.10 EP titration (Ipol/Upol)

Here you define the control and evaluation of an end point titration with voltametric or ampe-rometric indication.

Titrant/Sensor

Indication

Predispensing

Titrant addition

End point

Tendency

Termination





Method

Indication METHOD

VoltametricAmperometric

Esc Modify

E [mV]

V [mL]

3.3.10.2 Indication

Press <F4> to select the voltametric or amperometric titration :

Voltametric The potential difference between two metal electrodes is measured bypolarizing them with a constant current (in the case of the DM142electrode, the two pins of the platinum electrode are polarized).

– Press <F4> to enter the current Ipol. Its value depends among otherthings on:• the electrode itself (e.g. distance between the platinum pins in the

case of the DM142 electrode)• the dissolved substance to be determined and its concentration• the solvent• the reaction with the titrant.

You can obtain an initial starting point for the current intensity to beselected by measuring the corresponding solutions with different currentintensities (see Section 6.1.4) and recording the voltage value. Thisshould lie within the measurement range ±1500 mV for both the initialand the end point potential (see Section 12.1: Technical Data).

Example of a Karl Fischer titration with Hydranal(2-component system)

EP titration (Ipol/Upol): Indication


Method

E [µA]

V [mL]

Amperometric The potential difference between two metal electrodes is measured bypolarizing them with a constant voltage (in the case of the DM142 elec-trode, the two pins of the platinum electrode are polarized).

– Press <F4> to enter the voltage Upol. Its value depends on the samefactors mentioned under the parameter "Voltametric".

You can obtain an initial starting point for the voltage to be selected bymeasuring the corresponding solutions with different voltage values (seeSection 6.1.4) and recording the current intensity. This should lie withinthe measurement range ±150 µA for both the initial and the end pointpotential (see Setion 12.1: Technical Data).

Example of a Karl Fischer titration with Hydranal(2-component system)

EP titration (Ipol/Upol): Indication


Method


to volumeto (factor x sample size)No

Esc Modify

sample size


Predispensing shortens the titration time. You can select one or two predispensing modeswhen you press <F4>.

Volume You dispense to a specified volume [mL] that you can enter when youpress <F4>. Instead of a number, you can enter a formula.You can also enter a wait time: After the predispensing, the titrator waitsfor this time to elapse before it adds the titrant in a controlled manner.

Factor x You dispense to a specified volume that is calculated from the product ofthe sample weight or volume and a factor; you can enter this factor if youpress <F4>.You can also enter a wait time (see "Volume").


With the predispensing, the titrator dispenses the volume in one step.

EP titration (Ipol/Upol): Predispensing


MethodEP titration (Ipol/Upol): Titrant addition/End point


The addition can only be continuous (see Section 3.3.7.3: Continuous titrant addition):

The titrator dispenses the titrant slowly at the start then at the maximumrate until the defined control band. Within the control range, the dispens-ing rate decreases exponentially. In the vicinity of the end point, thetitrator adds the increment ∆V(min) (see diagram in Section 3.3.7.3); thesmallest increment that the titrator can dispense is 1/5 000 of the burettevolume.

For ∆V(min) you can enter a formula instead of a number.

The titrator measures the initial potential ET1 after 1 - 3 seconds and forthe table of measured values it acquires a measured value every 5seconds. The titrator can store maximum 300 measured values. If thislimit is exceeded, it reduces the number of measured values by half byleaving only every second measured value in the memory. The newmeasured values continue to be acquired every 5 seconds.

Note: The control band determines the control and the speed of the end point titration. To entera "reasonable" value, you should perform an equivalence point titration with timed-increment measured value acquisition. Using the table of measured values of thistitration, you can determine both the end point potential and the control band exactly.

3.3.10.5 End point

You enter the end point for the titration.

Instead of a number, you can enter a formula or call up a potential storedas an auxiliary value.


Control band [mV, µA] 500.0

∆V(min) [mL] 0.01

Esc OK

End point METHOD

Potential [mV, µA] 100.0

Esc OK


Method

Termination METHOD

Maximum volume [mL] 10.0Delay [s] YesMaximum time [s] No

Esc OK

Tendency METHOD

Tendency Negative

Esc Modify OK

3.3.10.6 Tendency

A titration exhibits a positive or negative mV or µA change. You have to define this.

Note: The tendency of a voltametric titration with a positive current intensity is negative, witha negative current intensity it is positive. The tendency of an amperometric titration witha positive voltage is positive, with a negative voltage it is negative.

3.3.10.7 Termination

You define the termination of a titration by selecting two resp. three parameters.

Maximum volume You must define the volume. It is intended as a safety precaution: if thetitration is faulty, an excess amount of titrant is not added unnecessarily.

Delay is the time from attainment of the end point up to definitive termination ofthe titration. If the measured value of the end point decreases within thespecified time, the titrator adds additional increments.

Maximum time Instead of or in addition to the delay time, you can also enter a time whenthe titration should be stopped.Enter a maximum time when, e.g. you perform a stating (see METTLERmethod 90016: Drift determination for KF titrations).If you define a value for both termination parameters, the titration will beterminated when one of the two values is reached.

Note: If the titration is terminated because the maximum time has beenreached, no end point will be calculated. VEND (VEX) is recordedas the raw result.

EP titration (Ipol/Upol): Tendency/Termination


MethodpH/mV-stat

3.3.11 pH/mV-stat

With the aid of this function you can perform a pH-stating. You determine the parameters whichassure the constancy of a potential value, which lead to termination of the pH-stating and whichare used for the evaluation.

Titrant/Sensor

Pretitration

End point

Tendency

Termination

Storage interval

Evaluation

The titrator determines the following raw results (see also 8.1: List of symbols):

• the titrant consumption in mL or mmol up to termination of the pH-stating.

• the titrant consumption in mL or mmol up to attainment of defined time limits.

• the mean titrant consumption in mL/min or mmol/min within the defined time limits.

• the correlation coefficient CSTAT, which results from calculation of the mean titrantconsumption through linear regression.

Notes

1. If you have selected a temperature sensor under the Sample function, the temperature ofthe sample solution is measured automatically before the titrator executes this function. Ifyou have not attached a sensor (parameter "Manual"), the titrator adopts the temperatureentered at the start of the method. The slope of the pH electrode is temperature-correctedby this measured or entered value and incorporated in the calculation of the pH value.

2. In the recording of a titration curve, you obtain only the actual pH-stating. You can followthe graphical plot of the pretitration only on the display.

Titrant/SensorTo modify the titrant or the sensor, press <F4>:

Titrant NaOH


Sensor DG111

Unit of meas. mV


Method





unit defined in the Setup menu, otherwise you will receive an error mes-sage when the method is started.

PretitrationSelect the pretitration if the potential value of your solution differs from the value you need forthe pH-stating:

– Press <F4> and select "Yes" in the mask that appears.

– Press <F4> and enter the control band [mV, pH, ...] in the mask that appears (see Section3.3.7.3: EP titration, Titrant addition).

End point

pH/mV-stat

End point METHOD

Potential [mV, pH,...] 8Control band [mV, pH,...] 0.7

Esc OK

Potential The value you enter here is kept constant during the pH-stating. Insteadof a number, you can enter a formula or call up a potential stored as anauxiliary value (see example in Section 3.3.7.4).

Control band The defined value controls the end point range: The lower the value, thefaster the titrator reacts to a deviation from the potential of the defined endpoint.

Help

You can accept suggested values for the value of the control band: Press<F3> and confirm a value in the mask that appears with OK.

• For pH-statings whose end point lies in a steep control range, thecontrol band must be larger than for statings whose end point lies in aflat control range.


Method

TendencyThe tendency you have to define refers to the titrant which is added. The kinetics of the reactiondetermined by pH-stating are always in the opposite direction!

– Press <F4> and select "Positive" or "Negative" in the mask that appears.

TerminationYou define the termination of the pH-stating by the following parameters:

Maximum volume [mL] 10

t(min) [s] 60

t(max) [s] 600

Minimum consumption [mL] 0.1

Time span [s] 10

Maximum volume The entry is intended as a safety precaution: if the titration is faulty, anexcess amount of titrant is not added unnecessarily.

t(min) is the earliest time a termination can take place; it depends on theminimum consumption within the defined time range.

t(max) is the time when the pH-stating should be terminated.

Min. consumption The stating is terminated when not more than 0.1 mL titrant are consumedwithin 10 seconds (example of default parameters).

This condition can be effective at the earliest after 60 seconds [t(min)].After 600 seconds [t(max)], the stating is terminated even if the conditionis not met.

Storage intervalYou define a time interval for storage of the measurement data.

– Press <F4> and enter the interval in the mask that appears.

With the default value, the current measured value and the associated volume are stored after10 s.The titrator can store and print out maximum 300 measured values. If the defined interval istoo small, after 300 measured values the titrator first eliminates the values of the pretitration.If the limit of 300 measured values is then again exceeded, it reduces their number by half byleaving only every second measured value in the memory. The measured values continue tobe stored at the defined interval.

Time span

pH/mV-stat


Method

EvaluationThe following parameters define the evaluation of the pH-stating:

∆V/∆t [mL/s]

t [s]

2

3

t(min)

4

t(max)

1

pH/mV-stat

Evaluation METHOD

Time limit t1 [s] 100.0Time limit t2 [s] 200.0

Esc OK

Time limit t1 The titrant consumption is calculated up to the defined times t1 and t2(see Section 8.1: List of symbols).

The time limits are not restricted to the values t1 and t2 entered here. Inone of the additional Calculation functions, you can calculate, e.g.• the mean titrant consumption within different time limits with

R = QSTAT (100, 200).• the titrant consumption up to a different time limit with

R = VT (200).• the correlation coefficient within a different time limit with

R = CSTAT (300, 600).

In this manner you can also define additional results with new time limitsfollowing a pH-stating (see Section 6.5.3: Perform calculations).

Example of the progress of a pH-stating with time

Time limit t2

1: Pretitration

2: When the end point is reached, the titratorwaits 5 s before sending an audio signal andthe message "Pretitration complete: Pleaseadd sample!". The titrator continues to exertcontrol and stir.

3: You enter your sample and confirm themessage with OK: The titration starts. If youhave to remove the titration vessel for addi-tion, you can stop the stirrer during this time(see Section 6.2)

4: The termination condition of ∆V/∆t is met,the pH-stating is terminated.


MethodCalculation

3.3.12 Calculation

You can use this function to calculate one result R for every sample.

Formula R=Q*C/m

Constant C=M/(10*z)

Decimal places 3

Result unit %

Result name

Statistics No

Formula Press <F4> to open the "List of formulas" and select a different formulaor enter the one you need for your calculation (see also Section 8.4:Examples of formulas).

Constant Press <F4> to open the "List of constants" and select a different constantor enter the one you need for your calculation.

Symbol

You can select the symbols you need for your calculation from the list thatappears by pressing <F3>. It contains all symbols possible for theindividual functions (see also Section 8.1: List of symbols).

You can link together all available parameters and numeric values.

Example illustrating the entry of the formula "R=QSTAT(120,180)":- Press <F4> and accept "R=VSTAT(100,200)",- position the cursor on "V", delete it and select "Q" from the list,- replace "100" by "120",- skip the comma with the cursor and- replace "200" by "180".

The following operations are available for calculations:

on the keypad in "List of formulas"

• Addition: + • Logarithmic function to base 10: lg(x)• Subtraction: – • Logarithmic function to base e: ln(x)

• Multiplication: * • Exponential function to base 10: pw(x)

• Division: / • Exponential function to base e: ex(x)• Squaring function: sq(x)• Square root function: sr(x)


Method

Decimal places Enter the number of decimal places you require in the result.

Result unit Press <F4> to select the unit from the selection menu.

Result name You can enter the name with an attached keyboard.

Statistics Use <F4> to select whether a statistical calculation should be performed."Yes": in the analysis of a sample series the mean value x, the standarddeviation s and the relative standard deviation srel are calculated andrecorded.

Notes

1. Some standard methods include three Calculation functions. If you need only one result,delete the formula "Rn = ..." with CE. This skips the function when the method is processed.

Calculation

2. For the calculation of a titrationcurve with 3 equivalence points(acidic mixture of 3 substances),you must define the parametersof the three Calculation functions.

R1

R2

R3

Q2 Q3Q1V

E

Formula Constant Unit

1st Calculation function: R1 = Q1∗ C1 / m C1 = M / (10 ∗ z) [%]

2nd Calculation function: R2 = Q2 ∗ C2 / m C2 = (60.01 ∗ 1000) / 1 [ppm]

3rd Calculation function: R3 = Q3 ∗ C3 / m C3 = 53.5 / 1 [mg/g]

Another example is the METTLER method 90001: In addition to the NaOH consumption inmL as a result, the acid content of HCl in mol/L and in g/L are calculated.

3. R and C are indexed according to the preset sequence. If you delete, e.g. the formula"R2 =...", 3 remains as the index for the third calculation if you do not change it yourself (seeSection 8.2: Use of indices).


Method

4. You must enter the molar mass M and the equivalent number z of the 2nd and 3rdCalculation function as numeric values or insert as Hj if you have stored them as auxiliaryvalues (see Section 2.5): M and z are defined in the Sample function for the calculationof the first equivalence point (see Section 3.3.2).

5. If you do not know the number of equivalence points, you can have Q recognized by acondition instead of defining indices for Q (see "List of formulas").Example: R = Q (200 < EPOT < 300) means that the Q used for the calculation is that whoseequivalence point potential lies between 200 and 300 mV. If the titrator detects more thanone equivalence point in this range, it calculates the first (see also Section 8.4.3).

6. The titrator checks your entries when you quit the parameter mask with OK. If you haveentered wrong formulas or constants, you immediately receive an appropriate errormessage, e.g.

Calculation

Error No. 3 METHODWrong formulaModifyTerminate

OK

Modify: You can change the entry.Terminate: The entry last stored reappears.

If you have used raw results (e.g. R = QDISP) which the titrator can not determine as themethod does not include the Dispense function, you do not receive an error message untilthe method is stored.

7. The titrator stores results until you start a new sample series or switch off the titrator (seealso Section 8.5.6).

8. If you abort the method with Reset, an evaluation of the data obtained to date follows. Ifyou were to abort the titration sequence (see point 2), e.g. shortly before the secondequivalence point, you would receive result R1 but not R2 and R3 (see Section 5.2.4).

9. Under the auxiliary function Results, you can• perform additional calculations after the titration of a sample (see Section 6.5.3)• eliminate results (outliers) on completion of a sample series and thus modify the statis-

tical evaluation (see Section 6.5.5).


Method

3.3.13 Calibration

You can use this function to calibrate an electrode: its zero point and its slope are calculated.You determine the buffers which you use for calibration of the sensor. The potential of thebuffer solutions is acquired using the Measure function (see example in the Quick Guide).

Notes

1. As the slope of an electrode depends on the temperature, it is important to incorporate thetemperature in the calibration.

• Before the Measure function, the temperature of the buffer solution is measuredautomatically if you have attached a temperature sensor; otherwise, the temperature youentered before the start of the calibration is used (see Sample function, Sections 3.3.2and 5.1).

If you later measure the pH value of a solution at a different temperature, the slope of thesensor is temperature-corrected by the titrator.

2. The calibration data (zero point, slope and calibration temperature) are entered automat-ically with the date in the parameter mask of the sensor (see Section 2.2.2).

3. Depending on the number of buffer solutions measured, the titrator performs the followingcalibration:• With one buffer solution, it calculates the zero point of the sensor. The slope remains

unchanged.• With several buffer samples, it calculates the zero point and the slope of the sensor by

means of a linear regression through the measured points.

You can modify the following parameters:

Sensor DG111

Buffer type pH (DIN/NIST)

Result R 1

Minimum slope [mV/unit] -55.0

Maximum slope [mV/unit] -65.0


Buffer type Press <F4> and select the type in the mask that appears:• pH (DIN/NIST),• pH (MERCK),• pH (METTLER TOLEDO) or• pH, pM, pX.

Calibration


Method

Buffer type The titrator has 8 values each for DIN/NIST, MERCK Titrisol and METTLERTOLEDO buffer solutions stored which you can select to calibrate pHelectrodes. Under "pH, pM, pX (free selection)" enter values of user-selected buffer solutions to calibrate pH or ion-selective electrodes (seeNote 2).

Example illustrating selection of pH values of a MERCK buffer. Press<F4> to display the selection menu:

pH (MERCK Titrisol) METHOD

First buffer pH 4Second buffer pH 4Third buffer pH 4 ∇

Esc Modify OK

MERCK buffers METHODpH 3pH 4pH 5pH 6 ∇Esc OK

– Select a different buffer value from this list, e.g. pH 3 and confirm withOK.

– In the "pH (MERCK Titrisol)" mask select the 2nd buffer and againpress <F4> to select its pH value, e.g. pH 7 etc.

Notes

1. The buffer values apply to a temperature of• 25 °C for DIN/NIST buffers• 20 °C for MERCK Titrisol buffers• 25 °C for METTLER TOLEDO buffers.

If you calibrate at a different temperature, these buffer values areautomatically temperature-corrected and recorded on the printout.If you calibrate at a temperature that lies outside the defined range forthe corresponding buffer, "Temperature outside limits" appears in thereport; however, the calibration data will be recorded.

– If your first buffer solution does not have a pH value of 4, press <F4>(otherwise, select 2nd buffer):

Calibration


Method

Buffer type 2. For the pH, pM, pX buffer values you can also enter formulas.

3. Positive ions result in a negative slope, negative ions in a positiveslope.

Result R "1" (result index): The measured values E of the buffer solutions used arestored under the first Calculation function: R1 = E (see Section 8.2: Useof indices). The titrator calculates the zero point and the slope of theelectrode by linear regression by assigning the measured values to thestandard concentrations of the buffer solutions. The index must thus bethe same as under the Calculation function.

Minimum slope Enter the minimum and maximum slope; the slope of an electrode is ameasure of its quality.If you obtain a slope, e.g. with the pH buffer types in a pH calibration whichlies outside the limits you have defined, the calibration data are notentered for the corresponding sensor. The error message "Data nottransferred" appears on the report.

Calibration

Maximum slope


Method

3.3.14 Titer

Titer is an assignment function: The result R or its calculated mean value x of the titration ofa titrant is assigned to the titer by t = R or t = x and automatically entered in the parametermask of the titrant with the date (see Section 2.1.2 and the example in the Quick Guide).

Titer



Formula t = Press <F4> to select from the selection menu:

"x", if you determine the titer with more than one sample so that thecalculated mean value is assigned to the titer. The statistical calculationmust be selected in the Calculation function for this.

"R" only if you determine the titer with a single sample.

Note: If you delete, e.g. one result of these titer determinations under the auxiliary functionResults, the new calculated mean value will not be entered in the parameter mask ofthe titrant!

Titer METHOD

Titrant NaOHConcentration [mol/L] 0.1Formula t = x Esc Modify OK


Method

3.3.15 Auxiliary value

Auxiliary value is an assignment function. The result (R or Ri) or its calculated mean value(x or x [k]) or a raw result of the titration function is assigned to the auxiliary value Hj andentered automatically with the date in the parameter mask of the auxiliary value (see Section2.5 and Section 8.2: Use of indices).

20 auxiliary value memories are available: H1 - H20.

You can store, e.g. the following as auxiliary values:

• the blank value of a titration (example of the standard method: "Blank by EQP titration")• a raw result that you obtain under the EQP or EP titration function, e.g. "H6 = VEQ".

You can call up these auxiliary values in the Calculation function.

Auxiliary value

Auxiliary value METHOD

IDFormula H20=R1

Esc OK

ID Enter an identification if desired.

Formula Enter "H = R" or "Hj = Ri" if you determine the auxiliary value with a singlesample.

Enter "H = x " or "Hj = x [k]" only if you determine the auxiliary value withmore than one sample so that the calculated mean value is assigned tothe auxiliary value. The Statistics calculation must be selected in theCalculation function for this.You can also enter, e.g. "H (Hj) = VEND * 1.5" as a formula.

SymbolIf "Formula" is selected, you can open the list of symbols with <F3> (seealso Section 8.1). Select the symbol from this list which should beassigned to the auxiliary value, e.g. for the formula "H6 = VEQ":

- Position the cursor on "2",- replace "20" by "6",- position the cursor on "R" and delete "R1",- select "VEQ" from the symbol list.


Method

3.3.16 Report

You use this function to determine what data should be recorded.

Note: If your method contains two Titration functions, e.g. standard method "2 Step titrations(EQP)", a Report function also follows the first Titration function so that you can record,e.g. the table of measured values and titration curve of the first function. The reason forthis is that the titrator stores only the measured values of the last Titration function.

The titrator stores the raw results of all functions up to the determination of the nextsample within a series (see Section 8.5.6).

Report

Report METHOD

Output PrinterResults YesAll results No ∇ Esc Modify OK

Output Use <F4> to select the unit(s) or card to which the data should be sent:• Printer,• Memory card (not with DL50),• Computer,• Printer + memory card (not with DL50) or• Printer + computer.

Printer is stored as the default parameter (for the printer you havedefined, see Section 2.7.1).

If you have not defined a printer and/or computer, the function can not beexecuted. This case neither initiates an error message nor does itinfluence the titration.

If you have defined and switched on a printer, but this is set to "offline",the titrator waits until you switch the printer to "online" and then starts totransfer its data.

If you have defined and attached a computer, but have not switched it on,an appropriate error message appears.

If you have selected memory card but have not inserted one, an appro-priate error message appears.


Method

Results All results defined in the Calculation function are recorded for the currentsample after every titration. Use <F4> to select "No" if you do not want areport.

All results After the last titration of a sample series, the results of all samples arerecorded if you select "Yes" with <F4>. These include the statistics,calibration, titer and auxiliary value data if the parameter or the functionshave been defined in the method.

Raw results After every titration the raw results such as VEQ or VDISP of the currentsample are recorded if you select "Yes" with <F4>.

Table of mea- After every titration the table of measured values of the current sampleis recorded if you select "Yes" with <F4>.

Sample data After the last titration of a sample series the sample data of all samplesare recorded if you select "Yes" with <F4> (ID, molar mass, equivalentnumber, weight/volume, correction factor).

E – V curve After every titration the titration curve Potential vs Volume of the currentsample is printed out if you select "Yes" with <F4>.

∆E/∆V – V curve After every titration the 1st derivative of the titration curve Potential vsVolume of the current sample is recorded if you select "Yes" with <F4>.The ordinate representation is linear.

log ∆E/∆V – V After every titration the 1st derivative of the titration curve Potential vsVolume of the current sample is recorded if you select "Yes" with <F4>.The ordinate representation is logarithmic.

∆2E/∆V2 – V After every titration the 2nd derivative of the titration curve Potential vsVolume of the current sample is recorded if you select "Yes" with <F4>.The ordinate representation is linear.

E – t curve After every titration the titration curve Potential vs Time of the currentsample is recorded if you select "Yes" with <F4>.

V – t curve After every titration the titration curve Volume vs Time of the currentsample is recorded if you select "Yes" with <F4>.

∆V/∆t – t curve After every titration the 1st derivative of the titration curve Volume vsTime of the current sample is recorded if you select "Yes" with <F4>.

Report

curve

sured values

curve

Sample


4. Sample data memory ................................................................................ 4-3

4.1 Entering sample data ................................................................................ 4-44.1.1 Deleting sample data ............................................................................... 4-6

4.1.2 Printing sample data ................................................................................ 4-7

4.1.3 Modifying sample data ............................................................................. 4-7

4.1.4 Adding sample data ................................................................................. 4-8

4.1.4.1 DL50/DL53 ............................................................................................... 4-8

4.1.4.2 DL55/DL58 ............................................................................................... 4-8

4.2 Weight transfer from a balance ............................................................... 4-12

4.3 Requesting sample data from a computer ............................................. 4-13

ContentsPage

Sample


4. Sample data memory

This menu is used for the entry and storage of sample data. You can enter weight or volume,identification, correction factor and temperature for maximum 60 samples. The data remainstored even if you switch off the titrator; data of analyzed samples, on the other hand, aredeleted.

The menu is always accessible during the analysis to allow the user

• to see which samples have already been titrated

• to modify or delete data of samples not yet analyzed

• to enter data for additional samples.

The performance of the four titrators differs in this menu as follows:

DL50/DL53: You can enter data for only one sample series.

DL55/DL58: You can enter data for three sample series; these series can be run withthe same method or with three different methods.

You can enter the data of a so-called urgent sample.

With the Run key, method(s) and sample data are called up automatically and analyzed insuccession by the titrator (see Section 5).

Sample


4.1 Entering sample data

When you press the Sample key, the (blank) sample data list appears:


Add

Add SAMPLE

New sample seriesNew sample series (data: computer)1)

Esc OK

1) appears if you have defined and attached acomputer (see Section 4.3).

Sample entry SAMPLE

Number of samples 1Method ID 00001User Esc OK

Number samples Enter, e.g. 3.

Method ID Enter, e.g. 00001 (example for the standard method "Equivalence pointtitration", see Section 5.1): This calls up the method to be used foranalysis of the samples.

If you do not know the identification of the method, press <F4> "Modify":The method groups appear.– Confirm either user or METTLER methods: The list of these methods

appears.– Confirm the method you need for the analysis.

User Enter your name if a keyboard is attached to the titrator.

Sample


Note: The titrator also accepts methods stored on an inserted memory card or in an attachedcomputer: When you enter an identification whose method is not stored in the titrator,the method is first searched for on the memory card and entered (not possible with theDL50). If the method is not stored on the card, it is requested from the computer andentered (see Operating Instructions: Computer Interface Description).

Press <F5> to show the sample data mask (weight entry as example):

Sample No. 1 SAMPLESample IDWeight [g] 0.0Limits [g] 0.02 - 2.0Correction factor f 1.0 ∇ Esc Balance* OK

(Volume)

Entry outside limits SAMPLE

Modify entrySave entry

OK

* "Balance" appears if you have defined a balance in the Setup menu.

Sample ID Enter or modify or delete if you have already defined the identification inthe Sample function (Section 3.3.2).

Weight Enter or transfer from an attached balance (see Section 4.2).

• If you can not enter the weight or volume until during the titration, e.g.as you do not wish to lose time through back weighing, do not enteranything: As the titrator does not need the sample data until it starts tocalculate, the sample data mask appears again in the display during thetitration (see Section 5.1).

You can also enter the weight during the titration in the sample datamemory (see Section 5.2: Sequence of a pH-stat titration).

• If you have defined a fixed volume in the Sample function, no changeis possible.

• If you have violated the lower or upper limits of the weight/volume, butstill confirm this entry, the following appears:

Modify: The sample data mask reappears.Save: The weight is transferred. The sample data mask for the next

sample or the sample data list appears.

Sample


Selected sample The sample highlighted by the selection bar when you confirmed "Delete"is deleted.

Sample series DL50/DL53: All entered data are deleted.

DL55/DL58: All data of the sample series which contains the samplehighlighted by the selection bar when you confirmed"Delete" are deleted.

Limits You can not change the limits. These data do not appear if you havedefined a fixed volume in the Sample function.

Correction factor You can enter a value for every sample that is reconciled in thecalculations if you enter f in the formula of the Calculation function.

Example: Each substance has a different, known moisture contentwhose value you can insert for f:1st sample: Moisture content = 4% → f = 0.96 → R = Q * C/(m * f)

2nd sample: Moisture content = 3% → f = 0.97 → R = Q * C/(m * f)

Temperature Enter the temperature of the solution to be titrated. You can not changethe value if you have defined a temperature sensor in the Sample func-tion.

When you confirm the entries, the sample data mask for the second and the third sampleappears, followed by the sample data list:

4.1.1 Deleting sample data

When you press <F2>, the following appears:

No. Status Wt/vol. Meth. ID 2 ready 1.23454 00001 45321 ∆ 3 ready 1.67115 00001 45322


Delete sample(s) SAMPLE

Selected sampleSample series

Esc OK

Sample


Notes

1. You can not delete sample data of a series which are done until all defined samples havebeen analyzed. When you then press <F2>, you can delete only the series.

2. If the titrator is controlled by a computer, you can not delete the sample data (see Section6.8.3).

4.1.2 Printing sample data

A list of all sample data contained in the sample data memory is printed out.

4.1.3 Modifying sample data

The sample data mask of the selected sample appears.

• As long as the sample is ready, you can modify all parameters.

• If the sample is being titrated, in other words is active, you can modify the parameters aslong as the weight/volume of the sample has not yet been used for the calculation.

• When the sample is titrated, in other words ready, you can not modify any parameters.

Sample


4.1.4 Adding sample data

4.1.4.1 DL50/DL53

You add data of a new sample to the existing data of a sample series:

1) If you have transferred the existing data from a computer, "Sample to series (data:computer)" appears, see Section 4..If the series has been processed, "New sample series" also appears.

Sample to series The sample data mask for sample No. 4 of method 00001 appears(example in Section 4.1.1).

As long as you do not delete the data of a series classed as done, youcan add data for a new sample to the series.

The data of a processed series are deleted when you• switch off the titrator• select "New sample series" in place of "Sample to series"• modify the method used to run the series.

4.1.4.2 DL55/DL58

You either add the data of an additional sample or that of a new series to the existing data ofa series. The series are processed by the titrator in the defined sequence.

Add SAMPLE

Sample to series1)

Esc OK

Add SAMPLE

New sample series

New sample series (data: computer)1)

Sample to series ∇1)

Esc OK

1) appears when you have defined and attached a computer (see Section 4.3). If youhave transferred existing data from the computer. "Sample to series (data: comput-er)" also appears → scroll display

Sample


New sample You can add maximum two additional series to an existing series.

Before the first sample series (possible only if its method has not yetbeen started):

– Select a sample data line of the first series and press <F5> : The "Add"mask appears (see above and sequence in Section 4.1).

After the last sample series– Select a sample data line of the last series and press <F5>: The "Add"

mask appears.

Sample to series The sample data mask for sample No. 4 of method 00001 appears (ex-ample in Section 4.1.1).

You can add samples to a completed series before the titrator starts toprocess the next series, in other words before you confirm the result listof the last sample with OK.

As soon as you have confirmed the result list of the last sample of a series,all its data are deleted when the next series is defined. You can then enterthe data for a new sample series.

series


1 ready 1.36182 00001 45320 2 ready 1.23454 00001 45321 ∇

Add

No. Status Wt/vol. Meth. ID 2 ready 1.23454 00001 45321 ∆ 3 ready 1.67115 00001 45322 1 ready 5 2 2 ready 5 2 ∇

Add

– Select the blank line above the first sample and press <F5>: The "Add"mask appears (see above and the sequence in Section 4.1).

Between two sample series

Sample


Number samples You can not modify these: You can determine only one urgent sample ata time!

Method ID Enter the identification of the method which should be used to determinethe sample.


Urgent sample

If you have to analyze one sample immediately while a sample series is being processed bythe DL55/DL58, you can insert this after the active series sample. The sample series isinterrupted and then continued after the determination.

Example: The titrator is processing sample 2 of method 00001.

– Press the Sample key and select the active sample:

No. Status Wt/vol. Meth. ID 1 done 1.36181 00001 45320 2 active 1.23454 00001 45321 3 ready 1.67115 00001 45322 1 ready 5 2 ∇

Add

Add SAMPLE

New sample series1)

Sample to seriesUrgent sample Esc OK

Sample entry SAMPLE

Number of samples 1Method ID 00001User Esc OK

1) appears if three series have not yet been defined.

– Confirm "Urgent sample" with OK.

Sample


After entry and confirmation of the sample data, the following appears:

• When sample 2 is done, method 8 for the urgent sample is called up(see Section 5.4: Running sample series).

• When the urgent sample is done, method 00001 for sample 3 is calledup. The data of the urgent sample are deleted.

Note: When a defined sample series has been analyzed and you confirm the Add commandto add a sample to the series, "Urgent sample" is also available in the mask that appears(see previous page).

No. Status Wt/vol. Meth. ID 1 done 1.36181 00001 45320 2 active 1.23452 00001 45321EX ready 0.41894 8 3 ready 1.67115 00001 45322 ∇


Sample


4.2 Weight transfer from a balance

If you have attached a balance to the titrator, you must have defined this in the Setup menu.If not, "Balance" does not appear in the sample data mask.

Sample No. 1 SAMPLESample IDWeight [g] 0.0Limits [g] 0.02 - 2.0Correction factor f 1.0 ∇ Esc Balance OK

Weight: SAMPLE

> 1.36181

Esc OK

When you press <F4>, the value displayed on the balance appears, e.g.

The weight is transferred with OK.

If the weight violates the lower limit, three minus signs (– – –) alwaysappear after "Weight", if it exceeds the upper limit three plus signs(+ + +) appear. You can change or confirm the weight (see Section 4.1:Weight parameter).

With METTLER TOLEDO balances which have a key to transfer the weight,you can enter the weight values for a sample series from the balancewithout pressing a key on the titrator. The setting "Bidirectional transmis-sion mode" is required for this.

Some balances show the sample number, others also show weight limits(DeltaTrac).

– With weight "0.0" in the first sample data mask, press <F4>.

– Press the TARE key of the balance to display the current weight.

– Activate the weight transfer with the appropriate key of the balance: Theweight is entered in the sample data mask; at the same time, the titratorautomatically starts the weight entry for the next sample.

Sample


ID You enter the identification of the sample series stored in the computer.This is transferred to the sample data memory with OK. These sampledata can only be printed out or displayed ("Modify" command).


Note: For reports which are sent to the printer, the computer and thememory card,• the name entered in the titrator is always adopted,• the name entered in the computer is adopted if you do not enter

a name in the titrator.

If you wish to add the data of a new sample to a series transferred from the computer, confirm"Sample to series (data: computer)" in the "Add" mask with OK. The sample data are addedto the sample data list.

You will find further information in the Operating Instructions for the computer interface or theDLWin or LabX titration software.

4.3 Requesting sample data from a computer

If you have loaded the DLWin or the LabX titration software or an appropriate program on theattached computer, you can request the sample data stored on it. With the "Add" command,the following appears automatically:

Add SAMPLENew sample seriesNew sample series (data: computer)

Esc OK

Series entry SAMPLE

IDUser

Esc OK

Run


Run

5. Analysis ..................................................................................................... 5-3

5.1 Menu sequence up to insertion of the sample ....................................... 5-4

5.2 Analysis sequence of a sample ............................................................... 5-75.2.1 Fading out analysis ..................................................................................... 5-11

5.2.2 Analysis is interrupted ................................................................................. 5-11

5.2.3 Modifying method of the current sample series .......................................... 5-12

5.2.4 Aborting analysis ......................................................................................... 5-12

5.3 DL55/DL58: Modifying ongoing method ................................................ 5-13

5.4 DL55/DL58: Running sample series ........................................................ 5-15

ContentsPage

Run


5. Analysis

You perform titrations with a selected method. The data required for this are stored in theMethod and Setup menus. You prepare your sample, titrate it and receive the result.

You enter the sample data such as weight or volume directly before the start of each sampledetermination. These data are also entered in the sample data memory. To modify them duringthe titration or to add samples to a defined sample series, you can open the Sample menu.

While a method is running, you can call up the auxiliary functions "Stirrer" and "Results"; allother auxiliary functions and the Setup and Method menus are blocked.

In this menu, the functions of the Run and command key <F5> are identical, in other words youcan press one or other key.

The performance of the four titrators differs in this menu as follows:

DL50/DL53: One titration curve is displayed (EQP/EP titration: Potential vs. Volume,pH/mV titration: Potential vs. Time).

DL55/DL58: Seven titration curves for the display can be selected.

You can interrupt the analysis of a sample to modify parameters of theongoing method.

Run

Run


5.1 Menu sequence up to insertion of the sample

When you press the Run key, there are two possibilities for the display (as an example of therepresentation, the standard method "Equivalence point titration" is used. This has beenchanged for the determination of CaCl2 and stored with the identification 00001):

No data in sample data memory: All sample data in sample data memory (seeSection 4.1):

Menu sequence

Defined are RUN

Stirrer 1: Stand 1

Sensor 1: DM141Drive 2: 0.1 mol/L AgNO3Esc Print OK

∇

Sample No. 1 RUNSample ID 45320Weight [g] 1.23452


Balance* OK


3 samples, Method 00001

Delete Start

Defined are RUN

Stirrer 1: Stand 1

Sensor 1: DM141Drive 2: 0.1 mol/L AgNO3Esc Print OK

Current sample RUN

No. 1 of 3Sample ID 45320Method ID 00001

OK

* "Balance" appears, if you have defined abalance in the Setup menu

Current sample RUN

No. 1 of 3Sample ID 45320

Method ID 00001

OK

The Stir function is being processed

Notes

1. If you have defined an expiry date for the titrant and this has lapsed, an appropriatemessage follows the "Defined are" mask. In order to determine a titer before the sampleanalysis, you can confirm the message with Esc.

2. When the sample data mask or that of the "Current sample" appears, the sample is activein the sample data memory. The titrator executes the Sample function of the method andstarts to acquire the time for every determination as the raw result TIME (see Section 5.2:Example of an analysis sequence and Section 8.1: List of symbols).


Number of samples 3

Method ID 00001User

Start

Run


3. The titrator also accepts methods which are stored on an inserted memory card or in anattached computer: When you enter an identification whose method is not stored in thetitrator, the method is first sought on the memory card and entered (not possible with theDL50). If the method is not stored there, it is requested from the computer and entered(see Operating Instructions: Computer Interface Description).

Mask: Samples to be analyzed

Number samples Enter, e.g. 3; this enters a sample series.

Method ID Enter, e.g. 00001: This calls up the method which should be used foranalysis of the samples.

If you do not know the identification of the method, press <F4> (Modify):The method groups appear.– Confirm either user or METTLER methods: The list of these methods

appears.– Confirm the method you need for the analysis.

User Enter your name if a keyboard is attached.

DeleteIf, e.g. you have called up a method which you do not wish to use for theanalysis, you can delete it. You have this possibility available with directstart if you confirm the "Defined are" mask with Esc (see page 5-4).

Mask: Defined are

This mask appears so that you can check whether you have attached the resources requiredby the method.

• You can exclude the mask from the sequence (see Section 6.7.3).

• If you have not defined a resource or there is no RS or sensor option available for the definedresource, an appropriate error message appears.

Mask: Sample No. 1 (sample data mask)

This mask does not appear if you• have defined "Fixed volume" as entry type in the Sample function• have not defined a predispensing to "factor x sample size" in the EQP/EP titration function• have defined results such as "R = Q" in the Calculation function(s) which do not require the

sample size m.

Menu sequence

Run


If you still have to enter sample data such as the temperature for buffer solutions to bemeasured in a sensor calibration, you can do this for every sample in the Sample menu (seeSection 4.1).

Sample ID Enter or modify or delete if you have already defined the identification inthe Sample function (see Section 3.3.2).

Weight Enter or transfer from an attached balance (see Section 4.2).If you can not enter the weight or volume until during the titration as, e.g.you do not wish to lose time through back weighing, do not enter anything.As the titrator does not need the sample size until it performs calculations,the sample data mask appears again in the display during the titration:• either when the titrator reaches the EQP/EP titration function under

which a predispensing to (factor x sample size) has been defined• or when it reaches the Calculation function under which the sample size

m is needed for the result.You can also enter weight/volume in the Sample menu (see Section 5.2:Example of a pH-stating).

If you violate the upper or lower limits of the weight/volume but still confirmthe entry, an appropriate message appears (see Section 4.1).

Limits You can not change the limits. This information does not appear if youhave defined a fixed volume in the Sample function.

Correction factor You can enter a value for each sample which is reconciled in thecalculations if you insert f in the formula of the Calculation function (seeSection 4.1).

Temperature Enter that of the solution to be titrated. You can not change the value ifyou have defined a temperature sensor in the Sample function.

Mask: Current sample

• If you work with a sample changer, in other words you have defined "ST20A" as a titrationstand, the mask always appears, but is confirmed automatically (no OK command).

• If you have defined "Auto stand" as the titration stand, the mask does not appear as a system,e.g. a robot undertakes insertion or changing of the sample.

Menu sequence

(Volume)

Run


Analysis sequence

5.2 Analysis sequence of a sample

1st example: Method 00001 (see Section 5.1)

∇

Current sample RUN


OK

Stir function RUN

Wait time [s] 30Speed [%] 80

Hold1)

∇



Balance OK

Current sample RUN


OK


mV

mL

E – V curve

Result list RUN

Method: 00001Sample 1 R1 = 29.26 %

OK

The titrator starts to process the method with theSample function.(– Enter ID.)– Weigh in sample, enter the weight for the first

sample or have it transferred from a balance.(– Enter correction factor and temperature.)– Press <F5> or the Run key.

– Before you confirm this mask, fix the sample bea-ker to the titration stand.

The titrator stirs with 80% of the maximum speed for30 seconds (CaCl2 dissolves during this time). Theelapse of time is displayed.

1) appears only with the DL55/DL58 (see Section 5.3)

The titrator executes the EQP titration function.

1) appears only with DL55/DL58 (see next page)2) appears only with DL55/DL58 (see Section 5.3)

After the last method function, in other words beforethe result list appears, the titrator ends the timeacquisition for this sample determination (see Note 2,Section 5.1): The sample is present in the sampledata memory as done.

The sample data mask for the second sample ap-pears:– Procede as described under sample 1.

You are "prompted" to insert the second sample etc.

Sample No. 1 RUN

Sample ID 45320

Weight [g] 1.23452Limits [g] 0.02 - 2.0Correction factor f 1.0

Balance OK

Run


At the end of the series, the results of all samples appear in the display.

• If you confirm this result list, the mask "Samples to be analyzed" again appears. The methodused to perform the last titration is entered as method.

• In the sample data memory, all samples of this series are present as done. You can now addsamples to this series here (see Section 4.1.4).

• As soon as you start a new series or an individual sample, all data of the executed serieswill be deleted.

Notes

1. Changing stirrer speedDuring a titration you can always activate the Stirrer key to change the stirrer speed (seeSection 6.2).

2. Method with two different titrants/sensors

If, e.g. you have to use two titrants for a back titration and have only one burette drive, thefollowing message (example) appears:

Analysis sequence

If you have to use two sensors to, e.g. set the pH before the actual determination with aphototrode and have only one sensor option, "Sensor 1: DP660" appears.The message always appears before the function in which the second resource is needed.

3. DL55/DL58: Curve displayDuring the EQP/EP titration or EQP/EP titration (Ipol/Upol) or pH/mV-stat function, thecommand <F4> (Curve) remains active if the curve representation has been selected. Youcan select the following curves for the display:

E – V curve Potential vs. Volume

∆E/∆V – V curve 1st derivative (Potential vs. Volume)

log ∆E/∆V – V curve 1st derivative (Potential vs. Volume, logarithmic)

∆2E/∆V2 – V curve 2nd derivative (Potential vs. Volume)

E – t curve Potential vs. Time

V – t curve Volume vs. Time

∆V/∆t – t curve 1st derivative (Volume vs. Time)

Change resources RUN

Drive 2: 0.1 mol/L HCl

OK

Run


4. Result list

a. During a titration, you can always activate the Results key to view the results generatedto date (see Section 6.5.1).

b. All results of a learn titration are marked in the display by an exclamation mark(!).

c. With a sample series, the titrator skips the list for each sample you have excluded fromthe analysis sequence (see Section 6.7.3).

d. With a sample series, all menus and auxiliary functions between the individualdeterminations are again accessible if you do not confirm the result list of the sample.You can then, e.g. also modify the method used to analyze the samples of this series(see Section 5.2.3).This is no longer possible if you exclude the "Result list for each sample" from thesequence (see point c.).

Analysis sequence

Run


Analysis sequence

2nd example: pH-stating

This sequence of a pH-stating in which the titrator should start the titration immediatelyafter sample addition shows the entry of the sample data in the Sample menu during thetitration:

mV

∇



Balance OK

Current sample RUN


OK

s

E – t curve

No. Status Wt/Vol. Meth. ID

1 active 0.0 33 592 2 ready 0.0 33 593 3 ready 0.0 33 594

Print Modify Add

∇

Sample No. 1 SAMPLESample ID 592Weight [g] 0.1456


Balance OK

Table Values Curve Hold

mV

s

E – t curve

Sample

Run


The titrator executes the Sample function.

– Confirm the sample data mask without entering theweight.

– Add the sample and immediately confirm with OK.

The titrator starts the pH-stating (the Stir functiondoes not appear as the stirring time is defined with 0(zero).1) appears only with DL55/DL58 (see page 5-8)2) appears only with DL55/DL58 (see Section 5.3)

The sample data list appears.

The sample data mask appears.

– Enter the weight.

If the pH-stating is not yet complete, the E - t curve ofthe pH/mV-stat function is again displayed. Other-wise, the function executed by the titrator appears.

Press

Press

Run


Analysis sequence

5.2.1 Fading out analysis

During the titration you can• enter sample data: press the Sample key (see Section 4.1 and example on previous page)• change the stirrer speed: press the Stirrer key (see Section 6.2)• view all results generated to date: press the Results key (see Section 6.5.1).

The titration continues to run in the background.

– To display it again, press the Run key: The display shows the method function which iscurrently being executed by the titrator.

5.2.2 Analysis is interrupted

The titrator immediately interrupts an analysis in the following situations:

1. After the Learn titration function if it has not found any equivalence points (see Section3.3.8).

– Confirm the error message: The representation of the Titration function shown before theinterruption appears in the display (see example below).

If you wish the titrator to execute the remaining functions of the method,– press <F5>, "Proceed": The titrator executes the remaining functions.

2. At the immediate end of an EQP titration or EQP titration (Ipol/Upol) function when thecondition for the defined parameter Stop for reevaluation is met (see Sections 3.3.6.7 and3.3.9.8). The following display appears:

Reevaluation required RUN

EQP titr. [1] neq=0Confirm with OK and performreevaluation (RESULTS)

OK

Measured values RUN

6.789 mL265.9 mV

Table Curve Proceed

(Example)

You can now confirm "Proceed" (the analysis is continued) or press the Results key toperform the reevaluation, see Section 6.5.2.

Run


Analysis sequence



Delete Start

Note: If a method is interrupted which is not stored in the titrator but has been requested fromthe computer or a memory card, a reevaluation is not possible (see Section 5.1: Note3 and Section 6.5.2).

5.2.3 Modifying method of the current sample series

After every sample determination, you can modify the method used to perform the series. Arequirement is that you do not exlude the "Result list for each sample" from the analysissequence (see Section 6.7.3).

If you wish to modify the functions of the method,• all parameters of the Sample function are blocked with the exception of the numeric

parameters you have defined for the ST20A titration stand.• with all other functions you can change only the numeric parameter values.

When you save the method, the printer automatically records the complete method with themodified values: these remain stored for the method.

– To continue the sample series, press the Run key twice: The prompt to insert the next sampleappears.

Note: You can not change a method which is not stored in the titrator but is requested fromthe computer or the memory card.

5.2.4 Aborting analysis

If you wish to abort the sample which is currently being titrated, press the Reset key. The mask"METTLER TOLEDO/DL5x/Version x.x" appears.

• If you abort the sample at a time at which a result has already been calculated this isdisplayed in the result list (auxiliary function "Results"). If no result has been calculated, onlythe sample number will be listed.

Individual sampleThe sample is present in the sample data memory as done and is deleted as soon as you startthe analysis of a new sample.

Sample seriesA series is not aborted with Reset: The sample is present in the sample data memory as done.With Run the display for the remaining samples of the series appears (example):

Run


DL55/DL58: Modifying ongoing method

5.3 DL55/DL58: Modifying ongoing method

If you confirm "Hold" during a sample determination, the titrator stops the function it is currentlyexecuting. You can then modify the method used to analyze the sample:

- Press the Method key (example):

Methods METHOD

Method ID 00001

Print Modify

Notice METHOD

Parameters that you cannot modify are blocked.

OK

With OK the functions of the interrupted method appear.

• All parameters of the Sample function are blocked with the exception of the numericparameter values you have defined for the ST20A titration stand.

• With all other functions you can modify only the numeric parameter values.

If you save the method, the printer automatically records the complete method with the modi-fied values; these remain stored for the method.

To continue the sample series,

– press the Run key: The representation shown before the interruption appears in the display.

– Press the Run key or <F5>: The analysis sequence is continued.

In the case of an interrupted sample determination, the modifications apply only to thefunctions which the titrator has not yet started to execute. Exceptions are the Stir, EQP/EPtitration, EQP/EP titration (Ipol/Upol) and pH/mV-stat functions.

1st example: Stir function

If you interrupt the method at this function, you can modify not only the stirring and wait times,but also the rotational speed. On continuation of the determination, the titrator

• adds the difference between the defined and modified times to the stirring time remaining:the entire stirring time corresponds to the modified time and

• stirs at the modified speed.

Run


DL55/DL58: Modifying ongoing method

2nd example: Dispense function

If you interrupt the method at this function, change the volume and then continue thedetermination, the new volume is not added until the next sample determination.

3rd example: EQP titration function

If you interrupt the method at this function, you can modify, e.g. the value for the maximumvolume or the potential value for termination of the titration if this termination parameter isdefined within the method.

On continuation of the method, the titrator executes the modified parameters of the EQPtitration.

4th example: pH/mV-stat function

If you interrupt the method at this function, you can modify, e.g. the value for the control band,the volume for the minimum consumption or the time for the defined termination criteria.

On continuation of the method, the titrator executes the modified parameters of the pH-statfunction.

Note: You can not modify a method which is not stored in the titrator but is requested from thecomputer or the memory card (see Section 5.1: Note 3).

Run


DL55/DL58: Running sample series

5.4 DL55/DL58: Running sample series

You can store three sample series in the sample data memory of the DL55/DL58. These areprocessed in this menu by the titrator in sequence with your help. An attached sample changerautomates this procedure.

You can check the ongoing method in the Sample menu (see Section 4).

As soon as the next sample series is started, all data of the executed series are deleted. Atthe end of the processed sample series, only the data of the last series remain stored. Theyare deleted as soon as you start the determination of a new sample or series.

With all titration stands, the sample data mask appears only if you have not entered the weight(volume) for the samples before the start of the method.

If you work with titration stand 1, 2 or an external stand, you must confirm the mask "Currentsample" for every sample.

If you have attached a sample changer, the titrator titrates the samples of all measurementmethods without the need for your intervention. A requirement is that

• you have entered all sample data

• you have excluded the mask "Defined are" from the analysis sequence (see Section 6.7.3)

• the methods use the same resources or their setup data are defined at the other drive(titrants), at a different sensor option (sensors) or at the other ST20A output (solvents) (seecomparison of the titration sequences on the following page).

If you work with the auto stand, the mask "Current sample" does not appear, in other wordseach sample determination is started without confirmation. As a result, you can attach a robotto handle sample changing. The same prerequisites hold for the automatic running of sampleseries as for the use of the sample changer.


Run





6 samples, Method 210 samples, Method 8

Delete StartST20A Stand 1/2/external

Current sample RUN


OK

Result list RUN

Method: 00001Sample 1 R1 = 29.26 %

Sample 2 ∇ OK

Current sample RUN


OK

Result list RUN

Method: 2Sample 1 R1 = 4.234 mmol R2 = 2.31 g/L ∇

OK

Current sample RUN


OK

Comparison of the analysis sequences for three sample series at the ST20A titration stand or at stand 1, 2 or theexternal stand. (The masks "Defined are" and "Result list for each sample" are excluded from the sequence forstand 1/2/external.)

The mask "Current sample" appears for every sam-ple, but is confirmed automatically.

The titrator titrates all samples of method 00001.

It then starts to titrate the samples of method 2 (thesetup data are the same as for method 00001).

It then starts to titrate the samples of method 8 (thesetup data are the same as for method 00001). At theend of all sample determinations of method 8, thefollowing appears:

Result list RUN

Method: 8Sample 1 R1 = 97.386 %

Sample 2 ∇ OK

Current sample RUN


The titrator titrates all samples of method 00001. At theend of the 3 determinations, the following appears:

The titrator titrates all samples of method 2. At the endof the 6 determinations, the following appears:

The titrator titrates all samples of method 8. At the endof the 10 determinations, the result list with the resultsof all samples of this method appears (see mask inST20A column).

Run






Delete Start

Current sample RUN


If the titrator has to process methods which have the same burette drives or sensor inputs in succession on thesample changer, you have to intervene:

The titrator titrates all samples of method 00001.

It then starts to execute the functions of the firstsample of method 111: a different titrant and a differ-ent sensor are required. The following message ap-pears before the Titration function in which the titrantand the sensor are defined:

Change resources RUN

Drive 2: 0.1 mol/L EDTA

Sensor 1: DP660

OK

If you confirm the message, the titrator executes theremaining functions of the method, it then titrates theother samples. At the end of the 7 determinations, theresult list with the results of all samples of this methodappears.The mask "Current sample" appears for every sam-ple, but is confirmed automatically.

– Place the burette with the EDTA solution on bu-rette drive 2 and attach the DP660/DP5 Pho-totrode to sensor input 1 (pH option in slot 1) andplug into titration stand.


ContentsPage

Auxiliary functions

6. Auxiliary functions .................................................................................... 6-3

6.1 Sensor ........................................................................................................ 6-46.1.1 Measure potential ........................................................................................ 6-4

6.1.2 Measure temperature .................................................................................. 6-5

6.1.3 Calibrate temperature sensors .................................................................... 6-6

6.1.4 Measure voltage/current (Ipol/Upol) ............................................................ 6-7

6.2 Stirrer ......................................................................................................... 6-8

6.3 Sample changer ........................................................................................ 6-96.3.1 Change lift position...................................................................................... 6-9

6.3.2 Rotate turntable........................................................................................... 6-9

6.3.3 Dispense/rinse ............................................................................................ 6-10

6.4 Burette ........................................................................................................ 6-116.4.1 Rinse burette ............................................................................................... 6-11

6.4.2 Rinse tip ...................................................................................................... 6-12

6.4.3 Dispense ..................................................................................................... 6-12

6.4.4 Dispense continuously ................................................................................ 6-13

6.4.5 Titrate manually ........................................................................................... 6-14

6.4.4 Dispense continuously (Ipol/Upol) ............................................................... 6-15

6.4.6 Titrate manually (Ipol/Upol) ......................................................................... 6-16

6.5 Results ....................................................................................................... 6-186.5.1 Display result list ......................................................................................... 6-18

6.5.2 Perform reevaluation ................................................................................... 6-18

6.5.3 Perform calculations.................................................................................... 6-20

6.5.4 Display measured values ............................................................................ 6-21

6.5.5 Modify statistics ........................................................................................... 6-22

6.6 Report ......................................................................................................... 6-24


Auxiliary functions

Page

6.7 Miscellaneous ............................................................................................ 6-266.7.1 Define titrator settings ................................................................................. 6-26

6.7.1.1 Date/time format .......................................................................................... 6-26

6.7.1.2 Date/time ..................................................................................................... 6-27

6.7.1.3 Language .................................................................................................... 6-27

6.7.1.4 Report header ............................................................................................. 6-27

6.7.1.5 Titrator ID .................................................................................................... 6-27

6.7.1.6 Audio signal ................................................................................................. 6-28

6.7.2 Adjust measuring inputs .............................................................................. 6-28

6.7.3 Shorten analysis sequence ......................................................................... 6-30

6.7.4 Define user level ......................................................................................... 6-31

6.7.5 Activate control input ................................................................................... 6-32

6.7.6 Activate control output ................................................................................. 6-33

6.8 Data transfer .............................................................................................. 6-36

6.8.1 Memory card ............................................................................................... 6-36

6.8.2 Computer .................................................................................................... 6-40

6.8.3 Remote control ............................................................................................ 6-42

6.8.4 Bar-code string ............................................................................................ 6-43


6. Auxiliary functions

You can use these symbol keys to perform the activities mentioned below. These auxiliaryfunctions are independent of a titration method, but they can support or supplement a method.While a titration is running, you can activate only the functions of the Stirrer and Results keys,all other keys are blocked.

• Measure potential or temperature of a solution• Calibrate temperature sensors• Measure voltage/current (Ipol/Upol)

• Switch stirrer on or off, change stirrer speed

• Operate sample changer manually

• Rinse burette and burette tip• Dispense a specified volume• Dispense continuously• Titrate manually• Dispense continuously (Ipol/Upol)• Titrate manually (Ipol/Upol)

• Display result list of all samples of a series• Modify evaluation of an EQP titration• Perform additional calculations of the sample last titrated• Display measured values of the sample last titrated• Modify statistical evaluation of the series last titrated

• Print out additional reports of the series last performed or sample lasttitrated

• Define date and language• Enter calibration data of the measuring inputs• Modify analysis sequence• Change user level• Activate control inputs and outputs

• Copy data from titrator to the memory card and vice versa (not possiblewith DL50)

• Transfer data from the titrator to the computer• Select whether titrator should be controlled by the computer• Enter bar-code string (computer transfer)

Sensor

Stirrer

Changer

Burette

*

Results

Report

Misc. ...

Auxiliary functions

DataTransfer


6.1 Sensor

When you press the Sensor key, the following auxiliary functions appear:

Measure potential

Measure temperature

Calibrate temperature sensors

Measure voltage/current (Ipol/Upol)

6.1.1 Measure potential

You can measure the potential of solutions (mV, pH, %T, etc.).

Sensor DG111

Unit of meas. mV


Speed [%] 50



Report No

∆t [s] 5


Unit of measure- The defined measurement unit is entered automatically.ment You can select a different measurement unit from the selection menu

(press <F4>).

Titration stand Press <F4> to select: Stand 1, Stand 2, ST20A, Auto stand or Externalstand; this tells the titrator what stirrer it has to control.

Speed • 0% → The stirrer is at a standstill.• 100% → The stirrer stirs at maximum speed.

Temperature Enter the temperature of the solution to be measured if you have notattached a temperature sensor.

Temp. sensor Press <F4> to select: Manual, TEMP A, TEMP B, TEMP C or TEMP D.

Report Use <F4> to select "Yes" if desired: A measured value will be recordedevery 5 seconds if you accept the time interval of "5".∆t [s]

Sensor


Sensor

∆t [s]

You can start and stop the measurement with <F5>.

Start: The titrator starts to measure the potential of the solution. Themeasured values are shown in the display and are recorded.During the measurement, all other keys are blocked.

6.1.2 Measure temperature

You can measure the temperature of solutions (°C, °F or K).

Temperature sensor TEMP A

Unit of meas. °C


Speed [%] 50

Report No

∆t [s] 5

Temp. sensor Press <F4> to select: TEMP A, TEMP B, TEMP C or TEMP D.

Unit of meas. Press <F4> to select: °C, °F or K.



Report Press <F4> to select "Yes" if desired: A measured value is recorded every5 seconds if you accept a time interval of "5".

Start and stop the measurement with <F5>.

Start: The titrator starts to measure the temperature of the solution. Themeasured values are shown in the display and are recorded.During the measurement, all other keys are blocked.


Calibrate temperature sensors SENSOR

Temperature sensor TEMP A

Esc Modify Start

Sensor

6.1.3 Calibrate temperature sensors

You can calibrate your Pt100 or Pt1000 sensors. The zero point determined by this procedureis entered together with the date in the parameter mask of the corresponding temperaturesensor (see Section 2.3).

Temp. sensor Press <F4> to select: TEMP A, TEMP B, TEMP C or TEMP D.

– Press <F5>: the mask with the prompt to immerse the sensor in icewater appears. (We advise you to use a Dewar vessel.)

– When you are certain that the sensor has cooled to 0 °C, confirm thiswith OK:

• The calibration was successful if Modify and Start reappear in thedisplay. You can calibrate the next Pt sensor.

• If the measured temperature value does not lie between -2 °C and+2 °C, an appropriate error message appears.

– Confirm this message and first "check" the temperature value givenby the sensor using the auxiliary function Measure temperature(see Section 6.1.2).


6.1.4 Measure voltage/current (Ipol/Upol)

You can measure the voltage or the current of solutions with polarized sensors (mV, µA).

Sensor DM142

Indication Voltametric


Speed [%] 50

Report No

∆t [s] 5

Sensor Press <F4> to open the list containing the polarized sensors you havedefined in the Setup menu (see Section 2.4). Confirm the one you wantwith OK.

Indication Press <F4> to select: "Voltametric" or "Amperometric":

Voltametric: Enter the current value which should be applied to thesensor to measure the voltage.

Amperometric: Enter the voltage value which should be applied to thesensor to measure the current.



Report Use <F4> to select "Yes" if desired: A measured value will be recordedevery 5 seconds if you accept the time interval of "5".

You can start and stop the measurement with <F5>.

Start: The titrator starts to measure the voltage or current of the solution.The measured values are shown in the display and are recorded.During the measurement, all other keys are blocked.

Sensor

∆t [s]


Stirrer STIRRER

Titration stand Stand 1Speed [%] 50

Modify Start

Stirrer STIRRER

Speed [%] 50

OK

Stirrer

6.2 Stirrer

You can start the stirrer and change its speed, e.g. to dissolve a substance.



Start and stop the stirrer with <F5>.

Start: The stirrer stirs at the specified speed.

Changing the speed during a titrationTo change the speed during a sample determination:

– press the Stirrer key (this does not interrupt the method):

– Change the speed and confirm with OK: the stirrer stirs at the new speed or is at a standstillif you have entered zero.

– To follow the analysis sequence in the display again, press the Run key.


Sample changer CHANGER

Change lift positionRotate turntableDispense/rinse

OK



Esc Modify Start

Changer

6.3 Sample changer


You can control the sample changer (titration stand: ST20A) and the attached pumps/dispensers manually. For this you must define the sample changer in the Setup menu and haveattached it (see Section 2.7.4).

6.3.1 Change lift position

Position Use <F4> to select: bottom, middle or top.

Press <F5> to move the lift to the desired position.


Direction Press <F4> to select: forward or backward.

Number of Enter the number of positions the turntable should move forward orpositions backward.

Press <F5> to move the turntable the specified number of positionsforward or backward.

Dispense/rinse CHANGER

ST20A output RINSE

Esc Modify Start

Changer

6.3.3 Dispense/rinse

If you have attached a pump or a dispenser to an ST20A output, you can dispense or rinse thesensor in the titration vessel.

ST20A output Use <F4> to select: DOSE, RINSE or DISPENSER.

Start and stop the dispensing or rinsing process with <F5>.

Note: The relay at the "DISPENSER" output closes for 0.5 s and triggersthe dispensing.

Rotate turntable CHANGER

Direction forwardNumber of positions 1

Esc Modify Start

6.3.2 Rotate turntable




Esc Modify Start

Burette

6.4 Burette

When you press the Burette key, the following auxiliary functions appear:

Rinse burette

Rinse tip

Dispense

Dispense continuously

Titrate manually

Dispense continuously (Ipol/Upol)

Titrate manually (Ipol/Upol)

6.4.1 Rinse burette

Burette drive Press <F4> to select : Drive 1

DL50/DL53: The Modify command is missing.

Start and stop the rinsing process with <F5>.

Start: The titrator discharges 1 burette volume. The piston of the burettemoves below its zero position to ensure that air bubbles "hidden"in the stopcock are drawn in then expelled.


Burette

Rinse tip BURETTE


Esc Modify Start

Dispense BURETTE

Burette drive Drive 2Burette volume 10 mLVolume [mL] 1.0 Esc Modify Start

6.4.2 Rinse tip

Burette drive Press <F4> to select: Drive 1


Start: 5% of the burette volume are discharged to eliminate any diffusionwith solvent in the dispensing tube tip.

6.4.3 Dispense

You can dispense a defined volume.



Burette volume Press <F4> to select: 20, 1, 5 or 10 mL.

Volume Enter the volume to be dispensed.

Start: The titrator dispenses the specified volume.


6.4.4 Dispense continuously

You can dispense stepwise and follow the potential change as a function of the dispensing inthe display. You must define the following parameters:



Rate [mL/min] 1.0

Sensor DG111


Speed [%] 50






Rate is the rate of dispensing.

Sensor Press <F4> to open the list containing the sensors you have defined inthe Setup menu. Confirm the one you want with OK. The sensor acquiresthe measured values in the measurement unit you have defined for thissensor (see Section 2.2.2).

Titration stand Use <F4> to select: Stand 1, Stand 2, ST20A, Auto stand or Externalstand; this tells the titrator what stirrer it has to control.




Start and stop the dispensing with <F5>.

Start: The titrator dispenses continuously and acquires the potentialvalues of the changing solution. The measured values "mL" and"mV, pH,..." are displayed.

Burette


6.4.5 Titrate manually

You can titrate manually and follow the potential change as a function of the dispensed volumein the display. You must define the following parameters:

Titrant NaOH


Sensor DG111

Unit of meas. mV


Speed [%] 50






Unit of measure- The defined measurement unit is entered automatically.ment You can select a different measurement unit from the selection menu

(press <F4>).





Burette


Burette

Use <F5> to start, interrupt and continue the titration, use <F1> toterminate it.

Start: The titrator starts to dispense and increases the dispensingrate continuously. The measured values "mL" and "mV, pH,..."are displayed.

Hold: The dispensing is interrupted, but measurement of the poten-tial value continues.

Proceed: The titrator starts again to dispense at the smallest dispensingrate, in other words you control the addition in the vicinity of thedesired end point with the <F5> key.

End: The titration is terminated.

The results are displayed: the volume in "mL" and "mmol" and the poten-tial in the selected measurement unit. You can print out these results.

6.4.6 Dispense continuously (Ipol/Upol)

You can dispense stepwise and follow the voltage and current change as a function of thedispensing in the display. You must define the following parameters:



Rate [mL/min] 1.0

Sensor DM142



Speed [%] 50




Rate is the rate of dispensing.



Indication Use <F4> to select:"Voltametric" or "Amperometric":



Titration stand Use <F4> to select: Stand 1, Stand 2, ST20A, Auto stand or Externalstand; this tells the titrator what stirrer it has to control.


Start and stop the dispensing with <F5>.

Start: The titrator dispenses continuously and acquires the voltage orcurrent values of the changing solution. The measured values "mL"and "mV" or "µA" are displayed.

6.4.5 Titrate manually (Ipol/Upol)

You can titrate manually and follow the voltage or current change as a function of the dis-pensed volume in the display. You must define the following parameters:

Titrant 1/2 I2Concentration [mol/L] 0.1

Sensor DM142



Speed [%] 50




Burette


Indication Use <F4> to select:"Voltametric" or "Amperometric":





Use <F5> to start, interrupt and continue the titration, use <F1> toterminate it.

Start: The titrator starts to dispense and increases the dispensingrate continuously. The measured values "mL" and "mV" or"µA" are displayed.

Hold: The dispensing is interrupted, but measurement of the voltageor current value continues.

Proceed: The titrator starts again to dispense at the smallest dispensingrate, in other words you control the addition in the vicinity of thedesired end point with the <F5> key.

End: The titration is terminated.

The results are displayed: the volume in "mL" and "mmol" and the voltagevalue in "mV" or the current value in "µA". You can print out these results.

Burette


*

Results

6.5 Results

You can also press the Results key during a titration. The following auxiliary functions can beexecuted:

Display result list

Perform reevaluation1)

Perform calculations

Display measured values

Modify statistics

1) appears only when the titrator interrupts the analysis (see Section 6.5.2)

6.5.1 Display result list

You can view the results generated in the titration of a sample or a sample series. The list isdisplayed at the earliest (press <F5>) during the first titration (only "Method ID" and "Sample1" appear if no result is available).

6.5.2 Perform reevaluation

The parameters for the reevaluation of an EQP titration are displayed when the titratorinterrupts the current EQP titration or EQP titration (Ipol/Upol) function immediately beforecompletion as the defined condition for the Stop for reevaluation parameter is met (seeSections 3.3.6.7 and 3.3.9.8). In such a case, the message "Reevaluation required" appears(see Section 5.2.2) and you can modify the following parameters under this auxiliary function(example):

Threshold 1000


Range Yes

Tendency Positive

Potential 1 No

Potential 2 No

Maximum volume 5

– Modify the appropriate parameters and press <F5>.

A mask appears in which you can choose whether you wish to save the modifications of thesemethod parameters for this sample or sample series permanently or only temporarily.


*

Results

The titrator then reevaluates the titration curve.At the same time, the printer records this EQP titration/ EQP titration (Ipol/Upol) function withthe modified parameters. (If your changes still do not meet the defined condition, the message"Reevaluation required" reappears.)

– To continue the interrupted sample determination, press the Run key: The representationof the EQP titration/EQP titration (Ipol/Upol) function shown before the interruption appearsin the display.

– Press <F5>: The titrator executes either the EQP titration/EQP titration (Ipol/Upol) function(if, e.g. dispensing must be continued owing to the modified parameters) or the next function.

Notes

1. To evaluate the effects of your changes, you can• view and print out the table of measured values or curve (see Sections 6.5.4 and 6.6).• check the new raw results of the EQP titration/EQP titration (Ipol/Upol) function:

– select the auxiliary function Perform calculations (see Section 6.5.3)– assign the raw results to Rx or Cx , e.g. Rx = VEQ or Cx = VP1.

2. "Perform reevaluation" does not appear if the interrupted method is not stored in the titratorbut on the memory card or in the computer (see Section 5.1).

3. With the DL55/DL58, "Perform reevaluation" also appears if you interrupt the current EQPtitration/EQP titration (Ipol/Upol) function of a user method after a possible predispensing.The auxiliary function does not appear if the interrupted method is a METTLER method.


*

Results

6.5.3 Perform calculations

At the end of a titration, you can perform additional calculations for these samples. The functionappears when you press the Results key on completion of the titration. In the case of a sampleseries, this is possible only if the "Result list for each sample" is not excluded from the se-quence of a series (see Section 6.7.3).

DL55/DL58: The auxiliary function also appears if you interrupt the titration and then pressthe Results key.

When you select the auxiliary function, the following parameters appear:

Formula Rx = Q*Cx/m

Constant Cx = M/(10*z)

Decimal places 3

Result unit %

Result name

Formula Press <F4> to open the "List of formulas" and accept a different formulafrom the list or enter the one you need for your calculation (see alsoSection 8.4: Examples of formulas).

Constant Press <F4> to open the "List of constants" and accept a different constantfrom the list or enter the one you need for your calculation.

SymbolYou can take the symbols you need for your calculation from the list youobtain when you press <F3>. This includes all symbols possible for theindividual functions (see Section 3.3.12: Calculation function and Section8.1: List of symbols).

Decimal places Enter the number of decimal places you wish to have in your result.

Result unit Press <F4> to select the unit from the selection menu.

Result name You can enter the name using an attached keyboard.

Press <F5> to calculate and display the result(s), press <F3> to print it(them) out.


*

Results

Measured values RESULTS

5.621 mL-267.3 mV

Table Curve1) OK

DL58:

6.5.4 Display measured values

On completion of every titration, you can display the table of measured values or view thetitration curve of this sample again. The function appears when you press the Results key atthe end of the titration. With a sample series, this is possible only if the "Result list for eachsample" is not excluded from the sequence of the series (see Section 6.7.3).

When you select the auxiliary function, the following appears (example):

You can view either the table of measured values, the measured valuepair Potential/Volume or the titration curve.

1) DL50: With the "(display) Curve" command, the E-V curve is shown in the case of an EQP/EP titration and the E-t curve with a pH-stat titration.

1) DL55: The "(display) Curve" command remains active when you have selected it. Press<F4> to show the selection menu from which you can select one of the possiblecurve representations:

E – V curve Potential vs Volume∆E/∆V – V curve 1st derivative (Potential vs Volume)log ∆E/∆V – V curve 1st derivative (Potential vs Volume, logarithmic)∆2E/∆V2 – V curve 2nd derivative (Potential vs Volume)E – t curve Potential vs TimeV – t curve Volume vs Time∆V/∆t – t curve 1st derivative (Volume vs Time)

When you confirm one of the curves with OK, it is displayed.

DL53:


Delete result Using the result list you decide what sample result is an outlier and thendelete it.

Delete result RESULTS

Sample No. 1Result R 1

Esc OK

*

Results

Modify statistics RESULTS

Display evaluationDelete resultUndo deletion Esc OK

Statistical evaluation RESULTS

R1 n = 6x = 1.234 %s = 0.01268 % ∇

OK

– Enter the number of the sample whose result should be deleted, e.g.2.

– Enter the number (index) of the result defined by the Calculation func-tion.

6.5.5 Modify statistics

If you have selected Statistics: Yes in the method under the Calculation function(s), the meanvalue is calculated with a sample series of 2 samples, with more than 2 samples you also obtainthe standard deviation and the relative standard deviation. This auxiliary function is thenaccessible under the Results menu to modify the statistical evaluation, i.e. to allow eliminationof outliers.

The function appears when you press the Results key on completion of every titration. This ispossible only if the "Result list for each sample" is not excluded from the sequence of the series(see Section 6.7.3).

Display Example of a statistical evaluation with 6 samplesevaluation


Delete result If you confirm OK, the result is deleted and the statistical data arecalculated with the new number of samples. You can delete severalsample results and always view the final result in the mask "Statisticalevaluation" (example):

Statistical evaluation RESULTSs = 0.00346 %srel = 0.112 %

OutlierSample No. 2 deleted

OK

Undo deletion RESULTS

Sample No. 1Result R 1

Esc OK

You can use the parameter "All results" of the auxiliary function Reportto print out the new evaluation (see Section 6.6).

Undo deletion As long as the result list of this sample series remains stored, you canundo the deletion for all sample results:

– Enter the number of the sample and that of the corresponding result R:The result of this sample will be reincorporated in the statisticalcalculation.

*

Results


Output Press <F4> to select the output unit to which the data should be sent:• Printer,• Memory card (not with the DL50)• Computer,• Printer + memory card (not with the DL50) or• Printer + computer.

Results All results of the sample last determined defined in the Calculationfunctions are recorded when you select "Yes" with <F4> and press <F5>.

All results Results of all samples generated to date are recorded when you select"Yes" with <F4> and press <F5>. They also include the statistical data ifthese have been calculated (see Section 6.5.5).

Raw results The raw results of the sample last determined are recorded when youselect "Yes" with <F4> and press <F5>.

Table of The table of measured values of the sample last determined is recordedwhen you select "Yes" with <F4> and press <F5>.

Sample data The sample data of all samples of the current series are recorded whenyou select "Yes" with <F4> press <F5>.

E – V curve The titration curve Potential vs Volume of the sample last determined isrecorded when you select "Yes" with <F4> and press <F5>.

6.6 Report

On completion of each sample series, you can print out additional reports or transfer them toa computer (see also Section 3.3.16: Report function). In the case of a sample series, this ispossible only if you have not excluded the "Result list for each sample" from the sequence ofthe series (see Section 6.7.3).

DL55/DL58: You can activate the auxiliary function if you interrupt the titration and then pressthe Report key.

Report REPORT

Output PrinterResults NoAll results No ∇

Modify Start

Report

measured values


∆E/∆V – V curve The 1st derivative of the titration curve Potential vs Volume of the samplelast determined is recorded when you select "Yes" with <F4> and press<F5>. The ordinate representation is linear.

log ∆E/∆V – V The 1st derivative of the titration curve Potential vs Volume of the samplelast determined is recorded when you select "Yes" with <F4> and press<F5>. The ordinate representation is logarithmic.

∆2E/∆V2 – V The 2nd derivative of the titration curve Potential vs Volume of the samplelast determined is recorded when you select "Yes" with <F4> and press<F5>. The ordinate representation is linear.

E – t curve The titration curve Potential vs Time of the sample last determined isrecorded when you select "Yes" with <F4> and press <F5>.

V – t curve The titration curve Volume vs Time of the sample last determined isrecorded when you select "Yes" with <F4> and press <F5>.

∆V/∆t – t curve The 1st derivative of the titration curve Volume vs Time of the sample lastdetermined is recorded when you select "Yes" with <F4> and press <F5>.

curve

curve

Report


6.7 Miscellaneous

When you press the Misc. key, the following appears

Define titrator settings

Adjust measuring inputs

Shorten analysis sequence

Define user level

Activate control input

Activate control output

6.7.1 Define titrator settings

You can or must select or define the following settings for the titrator:

Date/time format

Date/time

Language

Report header

Titrator ID

Audio signal

6.7.1.1 Date/time format

You have several possibilities for the date and time notation. If you wish to change the existingformats, select this menu line and press <F4>:

Misc. ...

Formats MISC.

Date format 17-OCT-1995Time format 17:04 (24 h)

Esc Modify OK

Date format Press <F4> to select one of the four possible formats.

Time format Press <F4> to select the other format.

If you change the formats, e.g. after a month they are transferred to alldata stored at the time.


6.7.1.2 Date/time

To change the date or the time, select this menu line and press <F4>; the mask appears inwhich you can overwrite the date.

6.7.1.3 Language

In the titrator all texts are stored in English, German, French, Italian and Spanish. To changethe active language, select this menu line and press <F4>:

Misc. ...

Report header MISC.

Text:Text:

Esc OK

6.7.1.5 Titrator ID

If you wish to enter an identification for your titrator – this is always recorded – select this menuline and press <F4>; the mask appears in which you can enter an identification.

Active language Press <F4> to select one of the languages.

6.7.1.4 Report header

If you wish to enter an identifier or a text (with attached keyboard) which should appear in theheader of every report of a titration method, select this menu line and press <F4>:

Language MISC.

Active language English

Esc Modify OK


6.7.1.6 Audio signal

An audio signal confirms either every keystroke or draws your attention to instructions, notesand error messages. When the titrator is delivered, all these parameters are assigned a signal.To change this, press <F4>:

Audio signal MISC.

Keystroke YesResults YesMessages Yes

Esc Modify OK

Keystroke Yes: A brief signal sounds after every keystroke.If you do not wish to hear this, press <F4>: → "No“.

Results Yes: A brief signal sounds after every result that appears in the display.If you do not wish to hear this, press <F4>: → "No“.

Messages Yes: A signal draws your attention to error messages, notes and in-structions.If you do not wish to hear this, press <F4>: → "No“.

6.7.2 Adjust measuring inputs

The measuring inputs for sensors and temperature sensors must be adjusted to ensure thetitrator measures potential and temperature values correctly.

The adjustment of the measuring inputs is performed by METTLER TOLEDO and the calibrationdata of the characteristic line of each input recorded on a data sheet, which is enclosed withevery sensor option (see Section 10.5.1).

The measuring inputs of the pH option installed in slot 1 of the titrator in the factory are adjusted;the calibration data are stored and can be printed out (see mask).

Measuring inputs MISC.

Option in slot 1Option in slot 21)

Esc Print Modify OK

1) appears only if a sensor option is installed in the slot

Misc. ...


Calibration data MISC.

Sensor 1: Offset 0 Slope 30950Temp 1 (Pt100): Offset -15463 ∇

Esc OK


Sensor 1: Offset 0 Slope 30950Temp 1 (Pt100): Offset -15463 ∇

Esc OK


Sensor 2 (Ipol): Offset 0 Slope 26025Sensor 2 (Upol): Offset 0 ∇

Esc OK

Misc. ...Notes

1. If you receive a data sheet with a pH option which contains instructions for the entry of thecalibration data, you must follow these: If, for example, you install this or an additional optionin slot 2, you must enter the data of the data sheet for slot 2 (overwrite default values!).

2. If you receive a data sheet with a pH option which contains only calibration data, these arestored on the option itself. They are automatically adopted for every slot and can not bedeleted. In this case you can only view the data:

3. You always receive a data sheet with a KF option which contains only calibration data, inother words the data are stored on the option and are automatically adopted for each slot;they can not be deleted:


6.7.3 Shorten analysis sequence

During the sequence of an analysis, information is shown in the display which you must confirmwith OK to allow the titrator to continue working:

• the mask "Defined are" appears at the start (see Section 5.1), and

• on completion, the "Result list" for every titrated sample within a series (see Section 5.2).

You can exclude these two masks from the analysis sequence to accelerate it.

Defined Yes: The mask "Defined are" appears before the determination of asample or sample series. If this is not required, select "No" with<F4>.

Result list Yes: Within a sample series the result list appears after the determinationof each sample if you are working with titration stand 1, 2 or external.If this is not required, select "No" with <F4>.With series which you perform at a sample changer (titration stand:ST20A) or at an auto stand, the mask is skipped automatically (seeSections 5.1 and 5.4).

Shorten analysis sequence MISC.

Defined resources YesResult list for each sample Yes

Esc Modify OK

resources

for each sample

Misc. ...


6.7.4 Define user level

You can decide if all people who work with the titrator should also have access to the Setupor Method menu, i.e. have the possibility to delete resources or modify methods. If you have,e.g. temporary staff who can perform only routine analyses, it is good practice to block theiraccess to these menus.

Define user level MISC.

User level Expert

Esc Modify OK

Expert In the factory setting of the titrator, you have access to all menus. Tochange this, select "Routine" with <F4>.

Routine • In the Setup menu you can only print out the defined resources.

• In the Method menu you can only print out the methods.

• In the Data transfer menu, you can not- transfer data to the computer- remote-control the titrator- transfer data to and from the memory card- delete data on the memory card- format a memory card.

• In the Analysis menu you can not modify an ongoing method (DL55/DL58: see Section 5.3).

Expert To switch to the expert level at a later date,

– open this mask,

– and while holding down the Shift key, press key 1 three times: "Expert"and the "Modify" command reappear.

Define user level MISC.

User level Routine

Esc OK

Misc. ...


6.7.5 Activate control input

The RS option has a socket whose two TTL inputs you can activate (see Section 10.7). To dothis, you must have• installed the option in the third slot,• attached the devices whose signal should be scanned.

Misc. ...

Activate control input MISC.

Input In 3.1

Esc Modify Start

Input Press <F4> to activate the other input: "In 3.2".

Start: The input signal of the attached device is scanned until you press<F5> (Stop). The input signal Off corresponds to a voltage of 5 V,On to a voltage of 0 V.

Example: A level sensor is attached via a TTL input to check the amountof liquid in a container. The setup is designed for a maximum level of500 mL:

Level sensor

TTL socket

500 mL

• If the container holds more than 500 mL, the sensor sends the inputsignal Off.

• If the container holds less than 500 mL, the sensor sends the inputsignal On to indicate that the container should be filled.


6.7.6 Activate control output

The RS option has a socket whose four TTL outputs you can control (see Section 10.7). Todo this, you must have• installed the option in the third slot• attached the devices you intend to control.

Note: TTL are signals which do not transfer power. To operate devices such as a pump,you must connect an amplifier in the circuit (see Section 10.7)

Activate control output MISC.

Output Out 3.1Control mode On/Off

Esc Modify Start

Output Press <F4> to select: "Out 3.2", "Out 3.3", "Out 3.4" or Out 3.1".

Control mode The following modes are possible (press <F4>):• On/Off• Input controlled• Sequential

On/OffStart: The attached device is controlled until you press <F5> (Stop). The

output signal On (Start) corresponds to a voltage of 0 V, Off (Stop)to a voltage of 5 V.

Example: A pump is attached via a TTL output. The pump is switched on(it dispenses) with "Start" and switched off with "Stop".

Input controlled

Input controlled MISC.

Input In 3.1Output signal Normal

Esc Modify OK

Press <F4> to select the other input: "In 3.2".

Press <F4> to select the other signal possibility: "Inverted" (see followingpage).

Misc. ...


Control mode Example: A pump is attached via a TTL output, a level sensor via a TTLinput:

Container withlevel sensor

Pump withsupply vessel

TTL socket

The titrator checks at the start whether the signal of the selected input isin Section 6.7.5).With this voltage of 0 V the titrator controls the pump (normal outputsignal) so that it starts to pump liquid from the supply vessel into thecontainer with the level sensor.As soon as this container holds more than 500 mL, the pump is switchedoff automatically.

Inverted: The pump can be controlled only with the 5 V signal instead ofthe normal output signal of 0 V. When the pump is switched off,the voltage is 0 V.

SequentialYou can use this special mode to control, e.g. a dispenser.

Misc. ...

Sequential MISC.

Number of pulses 10Pulse duration [s] 1.0Interval [s] 1.0 Esc OK

Each pulse causes the dispenser to dispense a quantity of liquid. Thisdepends on the pulse duration, which you can find on the data sheet ofthe dispenser.


Control mode 3rd pulse1st pulse

Start: The dispensing starts and is stopped automatically when thesequence has been processed. You can also terminate the dis-pensing with <F5> (Stop).

IntervalOff

Pulse durationOn

Misc. ...


6.8 Data transfer

With the DL53, DL55 and DL58 you can back up your data on a memory card. You can alsotransfer the data to a computer or control the titrator from the computer; for this you can entera bar-code string.

Memory card

Computer 1)

Remote control1)

Bar-code string 1)

1) These parameters do not appear until you have defined the computer in the Setupmenu (see Section 2.7.3)

6.8.1 Memory card

You can use a memory card with the DL53, DL55 and DL58 to

1. • store user methods and resources when the user data memory is full• back up all data of the user data memory, i.e. resources and user methods.

You can reload these data when needed on the same or on another titrator of the sametype. The cards you can use are listed in Section 12.8, insertion information in Section10.6).

2. • store reports of analyses.You can print these out from the card at any time.

DL50: You can use only a memory card supplied by METTLER TOLEDO to load a new softwareversion.

Formatting a new card– Remove the write protection of the card and insert card.

– Confirm "Memory card" with OK: The message "Card not readable" appears. If you confirmthis with OK, the following appears:

Format card DATA TRANSFER

All data will be deleted!

Esc Start

DataTransfer


Directory DATA TRANSFERUser methodsResourcesMemory copiesReports Esc Print OK

Print: A list of the stored methods is printed out.

OK: A list of the methods, resources or memory copies appears if theyare on the card. You can then print out or delete an individualmethod, the list of selected resources or the list of the memorycopies.

Reports: If you have selected "Memory card" as output in the function orauxiliary function Report, the selected results or curves are stored underthe method ID and the date, e.g.

DataTransfer

Reports (series) DATA TRANSFER

90001 18-Oct-1996 11:48235 22-Oct-1996 14:3490002 22-Oct-1996 10:03 ∇ Esc Delete OK

<F5> shows the list of the reports for each sample of the series (seefollowing page):

Start: The card is formatted and the end of the operation displayed.Note: Formatting of a 1 MB SRAM card takes approx. 30 seconds, that of a 2 MB Flash card

approx. 4 minutes.

The formatting generates a directory and commands.

– Confirm "Memory card" in the Data Transfer mask again:

Display directory

Copy from titrator to card

Copy from card to titrator

Format card

Directory


Directory

1, 2 and 3 refer to the sample No., [1] to the number of the Report function(index, relevant only with special methods). [*] appears if the report hasbeen sent by the auxiliary function Report (Report key).

<F4> prints out the results and/or curves defined in the function.

From titrator...

User methods: With <F5> the following appears:

DataTransfer

Reports (samples) DATA TRANSFER

1 [1] 18-Oct-1996 11:48 2 [1] 18-Oct-1996 12:01 3 [1] 18-Oct-1996 12:23 Esc Delete Print

Copy method DATA TRANSFER

Method ID

Esc Modify Start

Copy to card DATA TRANSFER

User methodsResourcesMemory copy Esc OK

Enter the identification of the method; if you do not know this, press <F4>:The list of user methods appears from which you can select the one youwish to copy.• If a method with the same ID is stored on the card, an appropriate

message appears.

Resources: <F5> is used to show the list of resources from which youcan select those you wish to copy. Resources stored on the card will beoverwritten.


From titrator... Memory copy: With <F5> the following appears:

DataTransfer

You use this procedure to generate a backup copy of the user datamemory.

Start: All stored resources and user methods are copied and stored as"memory copies" on the card with date and time (see followingpage). During the copying operation, the message "Data are trans-ferred" appears.

From card...

Copy DATA TRANSFER

All data of the user data memory

will be copied on the card.

Esc Start

Copy to titrator DATA TRANSFER

User methodsResourcesMemory copies Esc OK

User methods: Use <F5> to show the mask of the method ID. If you donot know the identification, press <F4>: The list of user methods appearsfrom which you can select the one you wish to copy.• If a method with the same ID is stored in the user data memory, an

appropriate message appears.• If the sample data list contains data, you can not copy the method until

you have deleted these data (see Section 4).

Resources: Use <F5> to show the list of resources from which you canselect those you wish to copy.• Titrants stored in the titrator are overwritten if their names and concen-

trations are the same as the titrants being copied. All other titrantsremain stored.

• Sensors and solvents stored in the titrator are overwritten if their namesare the same as those being copied.

• All other resources are overwritten (temperature sensors, auxiliaryvalues, titration stands, peripherals).


From card… Memory copies: With <F5> the following appears (example):

Start: All data of the user data memory are overwritten by those of thememory copy of Oct. 10, 1996.• If the sample data list contains data, you can not load the copy

until you have deleted these data (see Section 4).

Format card To delete all data on the card in one operation, you can reformat the card(see start of this section).

DataTransfer

Load memory copy DATA TRANSFER

10-Oct-1996 16:4511-Nov-1996 10:1212-Dec-1996 14:34 ∇ Esc Start

Computer DATA TRANSFER

Transfer from titrator to computer

Esc OK

Load DATA TRANSFER

Notice: All data of the user datamemory will be overwritten!

Esc Start

6.8.2 Computer

You can transfer user methods and/or defined resources from the titrator to a computer. Arequirement for this is that you have• defined the computer in the Setup menu and attached it• loaded the DLWin or the LabX titration software or an appropriate program.

– Switch on the computer and start required program.

– Confirm "Computer" with OK:


Start: All data except those in the sample data memory are transferred.During the operation, the message "Data are transferred" appears.

Note: You can also transfer data stored in the computer back to the titrator. You will find furtherinformation in the Operating Instructions of the computer interface or in the OperatingInstructions of the DLWin or the LabX titration software.

DataTransfer

From titrator... Transfer to computer DATA TRANSFER

User methodsResourcesMemory copy Esc OK

User methods: Use <F5> to show the mask with the method ID. If youdo not know the identification, press <F4>: the list of user methodsappears from which you can select the one you wish to transfer.

Resources: Use <F5> to show the list of resources from which you canselect those you wish to transfer.

Memory copy: With <F5> the following appears:

Transfer DATA TRANSFER

All data of the user data memorywill be transferred to the computer

Esc Start


DataTransfer

6.8.3 Remote control

You determine whether the titrator is controlled exclusively by a computer. The requirementfor this is that you have loaded the DLWin or the LabX titration software or an appropriateprogram.

Remote control DATA TRANSFER

Status Off

Esc Modify OK

Data transfer DATA TRANSFER

Remote controlBar-code string

Esc OK

Status Press <F4> to select "On": The titrator can be controlled only by thecomputer, i.e. you can neither enter data on the titrator, nor start ananalysis nor execute an auxiliary function.

When you have confirmed "On", all that appears is:

If the sample data list contains data or an auxiliary function is running, anappropriate error message appears beforehand.

To follow the entries and commands of the computer in the display of the titrator, you can usethe following keys:

• Arrow keys → Scroll parameters of a mask

• Run key → Display of the active function of an ongoing method

• Sample key → Sample data list

• Data transfer key → Switch off remote controlEnter a bar-code string (see next section).

You will find further information on remote control in the Operating Instructions of the computerinterface or in the Operating Instructions of the DLWin or the LabX titration software.


6.8.4 Bar-code string

This parameter is intended for automatic systems. The string which is read in by a defined andattached bar-code reader is immediately transferred to the computer (see Section 2.7.3).

If you do not have a bar-code reader, you can enter the string here with the titrator keyboard.

Enter bar-code string DATA TRANSFER

>

Esc OK

When you confirm the entry with OK, the string is transferred to thecomputer.

DataTransfer


DL58

ContentsPage

7. The DL58 .................................................................................................... 7-3

7.1 Additional resources ................................................................................ 7-47.1.1 Control inputs (only with TTLIO) .............................................................. 7-4

7.1.1.1 Modify....................................................................................................... 7-4

7.1.1.2 Add ........................................................................................................... 7-5

7.1.2 Control outputs (only with TTLIO) ............................................................ 7-5

7.1.2.1 Delete ....................................................................................................... 7-6

7.1.2.2 Modify....................................................................................................... 7-6

7.1.2.3 Add ........................................................................................................... 7-6

7.2 Special methods ........................................................................................ 7-77.2.1 Additional commands ............................................................................... 7-7

7.3 Additional functions ................................................................................. 7-10

7.3.1 Temperature ............................................................................................. 7-10

7.3.2 Instruction................................................................................................. 7-11

7.3.3 Pump ........................................................................................................ 7-11

7.3.4 Two-phase titration ................................................................................... 7-12

7.3.4.1 Titrant/Sensor ........................................................................................... 7-12

7.3.4.2 Predispensing .......................................................................................... 7-13

7.3.4.3 Titrant addition.......................................................................................... 7-14

7.3.4.4 Measure mode ......................................................................................... 7-14

7.3.5 Control input ............................................................................................. 7-15

7.3.6 Control output ........................................................................................... 7-16

7.3.7 Sync ......................................................................................................... 7-18

DL58


DL58

7. The DL58

This section explains the resources, commands and functions for the development of methodswhich the other three titrators do not possess. With the preloaded METTLER and standardmethods, you can change only the parameters of the functions. The DL58 memory holdsadditional, Special methods which allow the insertion of identical or new functions or thedeletion of existing functions thus enabling you to develop completely new methods.

Setup menu Method menuSpecial methods

Resources Commands Functions

Control inputs Add Temperature

Control outputs Delete Instruction

Pump

Two-phase titration

Control input

Control output

Sync

Note: You can also run the special methods with the DL53 and DL55 if you purchase a dongleand the special methods available on memory cards (see Section 11.2).

DL58


DL58

Control inputs (only with TTLIO) SETUP

Fill level sensor

Esc Add Modify OK

Control input parameters SETUP

Name Fill level sensorInput In 3.1

Esc Modify OK

7.1 Additional resources

"Control inputs" and "Control outputs" are available in the Setup menu as additional resourceswhich you must define.

7.1.1 Control inputs (only with TTLIO)

You can use the parameters of this resource only if you have installed an RS option in the thirdslot. The two inputs In 3.1 and In 3.2 of the TTLIO socket are used for the attachment of deviceswhose signal should be scanned (see Sections 6.7.5 and 10.7).

If you select this menu and press <F4>, the following appears:

Notes

1. When the titrator is delivered, the English name for the fill level sensor is defined. Shouldyou wish to store the Spanish name, use the Modify command (see Section 7.1.1.1).

2. If you have added device names to the list, the Delete command appears (<F2>).

7.1.1.1 Modify

Press <F4>, "Modify", to show the parameters of the control input whose name and input youcan change.

Name You can change the name by pressing <F4> and selecting a new namefrom the list of input names which appears.

Input Select with <F4>: "In 3.1" or "In 3.2".

Control inputs


DL58

Storage procedureThe definition of the control input is stored when you confirm both the parameter mask and thelist of names of the control inputs with OK. The modification of a parameter is always storedwhen you press a Menu or Auxiliary function key (see corresponding paragraph at the end ofSection 2.1.2).

7.1.1.2 Add

With this command you can add a new device to the list of the defined devices. The followingmask always appears:

Control input parameters SETUP

Name _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _Input In 3.1

Esc Modify OK

You can modify the parameters by the procedure described in Section 7.1.1.1.

If you define, e.g. several devices with the same name, you must provide these with anadditional identification so that the titrator can distinguish them, e.g. Fill level sensor/2. If youdo not, a message appears (see Section 2.1.3).

7.1.2 Control outputs (only with TTLIO)

You can use the parameters of this resource only if you have installed an RS option in the thirdslot. The four outputs Out 3.1...Out 3.4 of the TTLIO socket are used for the attachment of, e.g.dosing equipment (see Sections 6.7.6 and 10.7).

If you select this menu and press <F4>, the following appears:

Control outputs (only with TTLIO) SETUP

PumpDispenserValve


Note: When the titrator is delivered, the English name for the stored devices is defined. Shouldyou wish to store the Spanish name, use the Modify command (see Section 7.1.2.1).

Control outputs


DL58

You can change the parameters by the procedure described in Section 7.1.2.2.

If you define, e.g. several devices with the same name, you must provide these with anadditional identification so that titrator can distinguish them, e.g. Pump/2. If you do not, amessage appears.

Control output parameters SETUP

Name PumpOutput Out 3.1

Esc Modify OK

Control outputs

7.1.2.1 Delete

If you press <F2>, "Delete", the device for the defined output will be deleted from the list.

7.1.2.2 Modify

Press <F4>, "Modify", to show the parameters of the control output whose name and outputyou can change.

Name You can change the name by pressing <F4> and selecting a new namefrom the list of output names which appears.

Output Select with <F4>: "Out 3.1", "Out 3.2", "Out 3.3" or Out "3.4".

Storage procedure

The definition of the control output is stored when you confirm both the parameter mask andthe list of names with OK. The modification of a parameter is always stored when you pressa Menu or Auxiliary function key (see corresponding paragraph at the end of Section 2.1.2).

7.1.2.3 Add

With this command you can add a new device to the list of defined devices. The following maskalways appears:

Control output parameters SETUP

Name _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _Output Out 3.1

Esc Modify OK


DL58

7.2 Special methods

If you press the Method key and scroll the menu downward (Shift and ∇-key), the followingappears:

Special methods

Methods METHODMETTLER methodsSpecial methods

Print OK

∇

Special methods METHOD

91001 Surfactant determination91002 Vitamin C determination

Esc Delete Print Modify

You can change these two special methods to meet your requirements and store them undera different method ID. Each new method is stored in the "Special methods" group.

7.2.1 Additional commands

You can modify the special method by changing or deleting its functions or by adding newfunctions. Virtually all functions can occur more than once in a method.

Special method

Functions

Parameters modify

delete

add


DL58

– Press <F4> when the surfactant determination is selected: The list of functions appears.


TitleSampleStir ∇ Esc Add Modify OK

Method: 91001 METHODTitleSampleStirTwo-phase titration ∇ Esc Add Modify OK

Method: 91001 METHODSampleStirTwo-phase titrationCalculation ∇ Esc Delete Add Modify OK

∇

Add You can insert a new function after every selected function (see followingpage). If you select a wrong order when inserting functions (e.g. you cannot place the EQP titration function before the Sample function), an errormessage appears, but not until the method is stored.

Delete You can not delete the Title function as it is used to identify the methodand must always be placed at the head of the functions.You can not delete the Sample function as it provides the titrator withinformation regarding the titration stand at which titration is performed.

Special methods


DL58

If, e.g. Stir is selected and you press <F3>, the list of functions you can add appears:

Stir .............................. (6) see Section 3.3.3

Measure .............................. (10) see Section 3.3.4

Temperature .............................. (10) see Section 7.3.1

Instruction .............................. (10) see Section 7.3.2

Dispense .............................. (6) see Section 3.3.5

Pump .............................. (6) see Section 7.3.3

EQP titration .............................. (*) see Section 3.3.6

EP titration .............................. (*) see Section 3.3.7

Learn titration .............................. (*) see Section 3.3.8

EQP titration (Ipol/Upol) .............................. (*) see Section 3.3.9

EP titration (Ipol/Upol) .............................. (*) see Section 3.3.10

Two-phase titration .............................. (*) see Section 7.3.4

pH/mV-stat .............................. (2) see Section 3.3.11

Control input .............................. (6) see Section 7.3.5

Control output .............................. (6) see Section 7.3.6

Calculation .............................. (12) see Section 3.3.12

Auxiliary value .............................. (20) see Section 3.3.15

Titer .............................. (1) see Section 3.3.14

Calibration .............................. (1) see Section 3.3.13

Report .............................. (8) see Section 3.3.16

Sync .............................. (20) see Section 7.3.7

– Select the function you wish to add and press <F5>. It will be inserted under the Stir function.

Note: The number in brackets is the maximum possible number of this function a specialmethod can contain.

(*): A special method can contain maximum 6 titration functions.

Special methods


DL58

Fix: With <F4> the mask appears in which you can change t(min).

T greater than set value: Instead of a fixed time you can select a condi-tion: The measured value must be greater orless than a specified set value: <F4> is usedto show the mask in which you can enter theset value [°C, °F, K].

t(max) is the latest time for the acquisition of the measured value.If you have selected one of the conditions for t(min), the titrator starts thenext function when the measured temperature T is greater than (lessthan) the set value and the drift condition is met, but at the latest aftert(max).

7.3 Additional functions

7.3.1 Temperature

You can use this function to measure the temperature of a solution under defined conditions.The titrator acquires the measured value as raw result T (see Note a. in Section 3.3.4).

Sensor Temp AUnit of meas. °C∆T [°C, °F, K] 0.02∆t [s] 2.0t(min) mode Fixt(max) [s] 30.0

Sensor Press <F4> to select the temperature sensor: TEMP A, TEMP B, TEMP Cor TEMP D.

Unit of meas. Press <F4> to select the unit: °C, °F or K.

∆T The temperature drift must be less than ∆T/∆t (0.01 °C/s) during theperiod ∆t (2 s) if the temperature is to be acquired as a measured value.This occurs within a defined time interval t(min) and t(max).

t(min) mode t(min) is earliest time for the acquisition of the measured value. Selectt(min) from the selection menu:

∆t

t(min) mode METHOD

FixT > set valueT < set value Esc Modify

T less than set value:

Temperature


DL58

Solvent With <F4> select the solvent from the list which contains those you havedefined in the Setup menu (see Section 2.8).

Volume Enter the volume that should be added. You have defined the pump rateof the device in the Setup menu.

Stir Select whether (Yes) or not (No) stirring should be effected during thedosing operation.

Text Enter the desired instruction.

7.3.3 Pump

With the aid of this function you can add solvent with a pump attached to the sample changer.

7.3.2 Instruction

This function allows you to intervene manually in the sequence of the titration method, in otherwords the method is interrupted. The entered text appears at the desired position during thecurrent method in the display. The method does not continue until you confirm the instructionwith Run.

Pump METHOD

Solvent H2OVolume [mL] 10Stir No Esc Modify OK

Instruction METHOD

Text _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _TextText Esc OK

Instruction/Pump


DL58

7.3.4 Two-phase titration

This section explains the first 4 parameter groups of this titration function. The explanationsfor those of the group Recognition, Termination and Evaluation can be found in Sections3.3.6.5 through 3.3.6.7.

Titrant/Sensor

Predispensing

Titrant addition

Measure mode

Recognition

Termination

Evaluation

The titrator records several measured values and volumes as raw results (see Section 8.1).



Titrant Hyamine


Sensor DP550

Unit of meas. mV






Two-phase titration


DL58


Predispensing shortens the titration time. You can select one of two predispensing modeswhen you press <F4>.


to volumeto (factor x sample size)No Esc Modify

Volume You dispense a specified volume [mL] which you can enter when youpress <F4>. Instead of a number, you can enter a formula.You can also enter a wait time: After the predispensing, the titrator waitsfor this time to elapse before it adds the titrant in a controlled manner.Notice: The wait time includes the time of the dosing operation!

Factor x You dispense to a specified volume that is calculated from the product ofthe sample weight or volume and a factor; you can enter this factor whenyou press <F4>.You can also enter a wait time (see "Volume").


The titrator adds the volume in one step. It adopts the potential valuesET1 and ET2.

sample size

Two-phase titration

E [mV]

V [mL]ET1

ET2

ET1: Potential at the start of predispens-ing or the titration

ET2: Potential after predispensing


DL58


For the two-phase titration, only the incremental addition mode is available.


∆V [mL] 0.05

Esc OK

∆V The volume increment that the titrator adds is constant (see Section3.3.6.3: Incremental titrant addition).


You define the duration of the mixing and separation time as well as the stirrer speed duringthe separation time.

Measure mode METHOD

Mixing time [s] 15.0Separation time [s] 50.0Stirrer speed (sepn time) [%] 10

Esc OK

Two-phase titration

Mixing time After the addition of every increment, the two phases are stirred for thistime at the speed selected in the Stirrer function.

Separation During this time, the two phases should separate so that a stablemeasured value of the corresponding phase can then be acquired.

Stirrer speed You can set your "own" speed for the separation time or set it to 0.

Note: If you use the auxiliary function Stirrer to• change the speed during the mixing time, this applies only to the

mixing time during the two-phase titration and for any functionsafter the two-phase titration.

• change the speed during the separation time, this applies onlyto the separation time during the two-phase titration.

time


DL58

7.3.5 Control input

With this function you can influence the progress of a method externally via the inputs of theTTLIO socket. This is possible only with an RS option installed in the third slot (see Section10.7). The titrator waits for the defined signal to be detected or the maximum time to elapsebefore it processes the next function.

Control input METHOD

Name _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _Input signal RisingMax. time [s] 10.0

Esc Modify OK

Name With <F4> open the list containing the names of the inputs you havedefined in the Setup menu (see Section 7.1.1). Confirm the one you wishto use with OK.

Input signal With Rising or Falling you specify the direction of change of the inputsignal when the signal you have defined is detected.

Max. time This time defines the wait time for detection of the signal. On elapse of thistime, processing of the method continues even if no signal has beendetected.

Control input


DL58

7.3.6 Control output

With this function you can generate TTL signals. This is possible only with an RS optioninstalled in the third slot (see Section 10.7). The nature of the signal depends on the controlmode you have selected. The standard status of the control outputs is "high".

Control output

Control output METHOD

Name _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _Control mode Fixed timeInstruction

Esc Modify OK

Name With <F4> open the list containing the names of the outputs you havedefined in the Setup menu (see Section 7.1.2). Confirm the one you wishto use with OK.

Control mode The mode determines the number and nature of the generated TTLsignals. The following modes are possible (press <F4> ): "Fixed time","On/Off", "Input controlled" or "Sequential".

Fixed time

Select this mode when you wish to operate a device that is attached to thecontrol output over a fixed time period.

– Enter the time during which the control output should be switched on.

On/OffWith this mode you can, e.g. switch on a device attached to the controloutput at the start of the method and switch it off at the end of the method.

– Select whether the control output should be switched on or off. Thestatus of the control output will be automatically set to off on completionof the method.

Input controlled

This mode allows a device attached to the control output to be switchedon or off by a device attached to the control input (e.g. pushbutton). Thefunction is ended when the signal at the defined control input changes orafter elapse of a maximum time.


DL58

Sequential METHOD

Number of pulses 10Pulse duration [s] 1.0Interval [s] 1.0 Esc OK

Name: With <F4> open the list containing the names of the inputs youhave defined in the Setup menu (see Section 7.1.1). Use OK to confirmthe one which should control the control output function.

Output signal "Normal": The signal is routed directly from the controlinput to the control output.

Output signal "Inverted": The signal of the control input is first invertedand then routed to the control output.

Max. time: The maximum time defines the wait time for the signal change.On elapse of this time, the method is processed further even if no signalhas been sent.

SequentialUse this mode to select devices which you can use to either triggervarious actions through different sequences or repeat particular actionsthrough single pulses of the sequence (see Section 6.7.6).

Control output

Input controlled METHOD

Name _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _Output signal NormalMax. time [s] 10.0

Esc Modify OK

Control mode

Number of pulses: Enter the number of pulses of the desired sequence.

Pulse duration: Enter the time during which a pulse should be switchedon.

Interval: Enter the wait time between the pulses.

Instruction You can enter a text which is shown while the function is active.


DL58

7.3.7 Sync

Under this function you specify the parameters for the synchronization of the titrator with anexternal control unit. The synchronization takes place via the system interface (RS option inthe slot 3!).

Sync METHOD

Sync mode SendCode 1Comment Esc Modify OK

Sync mode Press <F4> to select: "Send" or "Send/Wait".

Send: The titrator transmits the numeric code you have defined to theexternal control unit and then begins to process the next method functionimmediately.

Send/Wait: The titrator transmits the numeric code you have defined tothe external control unit and then waits until this sends back the samecode. Only then does the titrator start to process the next method function.

Code Enter a number between 1 and 32, which is sent to the external controlunit.

Comment Enter a comment, which appears on the display when the function isexecuted.

Notes

1. You will find additional information regarding the communication between the titrator andthe external control unit in the Operating Instructions "DL50/DL53/DL55/DL58: RS232CInterface Description".

2. Two titrators can also be synchronized by means of the system interface using the Syncfunction. You must then connect the two titrators using a null modem.

Sync


ContentsPage

Symbols and explanations

8. Symbols and explanations ........................................................................ 8-3

8.1 List of symbols ........................................................................................... 8-38.1.1 Compilation of the raw results ...................................................................... 8-8

8.2 Use of indices ............................................................................................. 8-9

8.2.1 Compilation of the symbols by indexing forms ............................................. 8-12

8.3 Evaluation procedures .............................................................................. 8-148.3.1 Standard....................................................................................................... 8-14

8.3.2 Minimum/maximum ...................................................................................... 8-14

8.3.3 Segmented ................................................................................................... 8-15

8.3.4 Asymmetric .................................................................................................. 8-16

8.4 Examples of formulas ................................................................................ 8-178.4.1 Results ......................................................................................................... 8-17

8.4.2 Constants ..................................................................................................... 8-18

8.4.3 Formulas for restriction of the equivalence point ......................................... 8-19

8.5 Restrictions in the analysis ....................................................................... 8-208.5.1 Maximum number of samples ........................................................................8-20

8.5.2 Maximum number of sample series in the sample data memory ................. 8-20

8.5.3 Maximum number of equivalence points per sample determination ............ 8-20

8.5.4 Maximum number of measured values per Titration function ...................... 8-20

8.5.5 Maximum number of results per sample series ........................................... 8-20

8.5.6 How long does the titrator store data? ......................................................... 8-20


8. Symbols and explanations

In this section you will find additional information which supplements Sections 3 to 7.

8.1 List of symbols

This list shows you the abbreviations of all symbols of the parameters and the raw resultsdetermined by the titrator together with their definition. If you enter the symbols using anexternal keyboard, you must comply with the uppercase or lowercase notation.

Function/Resource Symbol Definition

Titrant c Nominal concentration of the titrant in mol/L

t Titer of the titrant

N c * t: actual equivalent concentration of the titrantin mol/L (ACTUAL value); it is calculated automa-tically by the titrator.

Sensor ZERO Zero point of the pH electrode

SLOPE Slope of the pH electrode

Auxiliary value H Auxiliary value : H1 to H20

Sample m Sample size of the weight in g or volume in mL (forCalculation function)

M Molar mass in g/mol

z Equivalent number: Number of reaction entitiescompared to the titrant

Note: For technical reasons, the notation z* of DINstandard 32 625 has not been used for the titrator.

f Correction factor

Current sample TIME Time of a sample determination in seconds

List of symbols

(Sample data)


Function Symbol Definition

EQP titration ET1 Initial potential of the measured solution before thefirst addition of titrant in the defined unit of thesensor used

ET2 Potential after predispensing in the defined unit ofthe sensor used

VEQ Titrant consumption in mL up to the equivalencepoint or end point; the equivalence points arenumbered consecutively

Q Titrant consumption in mmol up to the equivalencepoint or end point; the equivalence points arenumbered consecutively. Q = VEQ * c * t

VEX Calculated excess of titrant in mL

QEX Calculated excess of titrant in mmol

VEND Total titrant consumption in mL (VEQ + VEX)

QEND Total titrant consumption in mmol (Q + QEX)

EPOT Calculated equivalence point potential of the equiv-alence or end point VEQ in the defined unit of thesensor used

EQP titration EHNV Calculated half neutralization value (potential atVEQ/2) referred to the equivalence point VEQ inthe defined unit of the sensor used

neq Number of equivalence points found (applies toone Titration function)

P1 Potential 1 in the defined unit of the sensor used(evaluation parameter)

P2 Potential 2 in the defined unit of the sensor used(evaluation parameter)

VP1 Titrant consumption in mL up to potential P1

VP2 or potential P2

QP1 Titrant consumption in mmol up to potential P1

QP2 or potential P2

List of symbols

Learn titration

EP titration(Ipol/Upol)


* Two-phase titration: Special methods


Two-phase titration*



List of symbols

E [mV]

V [mL]

EPOT1

EPOT2

EPOT3

EHNV2

EHNV3

VEQ1Q1

VEQ2Q2

VEQ3Q3

VEXQEX

1

2

3

neq = 3

EHNV1

VENDQEND

Example of an EQP titrationwith 3 equivalence points

Example of an EQP titrationwith evaluation of the definedpotential values

Predispensing toa: Volume or

(factor x sample size)b: Potentialc: Slope

V [mL]

E [mV]

-200

-100

0

+100

+200

P1

P2

VP1/QP1VP2/QP2



pH/mV-stat VTOT Total titrant consumption in mL

QTOT Total titrant consumption in mmol

VT1 Titrant consumption in mL up to time limit t1VT2 or time limit t2

VT Titrant consumption in mL up to a different timelimit

QT1 Titrant consumption in mmol up to time limit t1QT2 or time limit t2

QT Titrant consumption in mmol up to a different timelimit

CSTAT Correlation coefficient of the regression lines be-tween t1 and t2 of the V – t curve

VSTAT Mean titrant consumption in mL/min within thetime limits t1 and t2

QSTAT Mean titrant consumption in mmol/min within thetime limits t1 and t2

List of symbols

Note: VSTAT/QSTAT is determined by means of linear regression of the measured valuesbetween t1 and t2. CSTAT is the correlation coefficient of this linear regression. For acorrect result, CSTAT should be greater than 0.95.

V [mL]

t [s]

VTOTQTOT

t1 t2

VT2QT2

VT1QT1

V/t [mL/s]

VSTATQSTAT

t [s]t2t1

∆V/∆t [mL/s]


List of symbols

* Temperature: Special methods


Measure E Measured value in mV or in the defined unit of thesensor used (does not apply to polarized sensors)

Dispense VDISP Total dispensed volume in mL

QDISP Total dispensed amount of substance in mmol

Calculation R Calculated resultC Calculation constant

Cx Calculation constant (applies only to the auxiliaryfunction "Perform calculations")

x Mean value of the statistics evaluation (calculatedonly when the Statistics parameter is defined)

s Standard deviation

srel Relative standard deviation in %

Temperature* T Measured temperature in °C, °F or K of the Ptsensor used


8.1.1 Compilation of the raw results

Analysis/Function Raw results Printed out when "Rawresults" is selected in thereport function

Current sample TIME no

Measure E yes

Dispense VDISP, QDISP yes

EQP/EP titration ET1, ET2 noVEQ, Q yesVEX, QEX yesVEND, QEND noEPOT yes

EQP titration EHNV noneq noP1, P2 yesVP1, QP1 yesVP2, QP2 yes

pH/mV-stat VTOT, QTOT yesVT1, QT1 noVT2, QT2 noVT, QT noVSTAT, QSTAT yesCSTAT no

Temperature* T yes

Notes:

1. * Two-phase titration, Temperature: Special methods

2. To obtain the raw results which are not printed out as standard, assign these to the resultR, e.g. R = QP1, R = VT1.

List of symbols

Learn titrationEQP/EP titration (Ipol/Upol)Two-phase titration*

EQP titration (Ipol/Upol)Two-phase titration*


Use of indices

8.2 Use of indices

As some functions can occur a number of times within a method and parameters can alsoappear a number of times within a function, indices are needed in addition to the parametersymbol (see Section 8.2.1: Compilation of the symbols by indexing forms).

The titrator recognizes 4 different indexing forms:

1. Parameters without indexThese parameters include, e.g. c, t, M, ZERO, SLOPE, TIME. The parameters always referto the current titrant, the current sensor or the current sample determination.

The parameters of the functions which occur only once within the standard methods alsodo not need an index, e.g. E of the Measure function or VSTAT of the pH/mV-stat function.

2. Parameters of the form XiParameters which use an index without brackets are all those whose link with the methodfunction is meaningless. This indexing form includes R, C and H.

Example: R3: third result (see fourth indexing form)

Note: R = R1 holds, in other words if the index = 1 it may be omitted. This also applies tothe indexing forms under points 3 and 4.

3. Parameters of the form X [j]Index j is the function counter. This indexing form includes, e.g. VDISP, QEX and x.

Example: QDISP[2]: Measured value of the second Dispense function (extract fromstandard method "2 Step titration (EQP)")

EQP titration

Calculation

After confirmation of the "Current sample", the titrator dispensesand determines the raw result QDISP of the first Dispense function.

The titrator executes the Stir function, then

the EQP titration followed by the

first calculation function. To obtain the measured value QDISP asa result, set R1 = QDISP[1].

The titrator executes the second calculation function, then

Dispense

Stir

Calculation


Use of indices

the Report function before

it dispenses again and determines the raw result QDISP of thesecond Dispense function.

The titrator runs the second Stir function, then

the second EQP titration, followed by the

third Calculation function. To obtain the measured value QDISPas a result, set R3 = QDISP[2].

4. Parameters of the form Xi [j]

Index i is the number of times a parameter should be run within a function. Index j is thecounter for the number of functions within a method. This indexing form includes Q, VEQ,EHNV and EPOT.

Example: Q2[2]: mmol consumption up to the second equivalence point of the secondEQP titration function. Extract from the standard method "2 Step titration(EQP)", which has been adapted for the determination of HCl, CH3COOHand NH4Cl with NaOH. (The 2 titration functions were selected as othervalues have been defined for the equilibrium controlled measured valueacquisition in the determination of CH3COOH and NH4Cl.)

Report

EQP titration

Dispense

Calculation

Stir

E [mV]

V [mL]

EQP1

Q1[1] QEX[1]

The titrator executes the first EQPtitration function and titrates until theequivalence point of HCl. It deter-mines, among other things, the mmolconsumption Q1[1] and the mmolexcess QEX[1].

Q1[1] ≡ QQEX[1] ≡ QEX.

EQP titration


CalculationFormula .................................. R3 = Q2[2]Constant.................................Decimal places ...................... 4Result unit .............................. mmolResult name ........................... NH4ClStatistics................................. Yes

CalculationFormula .................................. R1 = Q1[1]Constant.................................Decimal places ...................... 4Result unit .............................. mmolResult name ........................... HClStatistics................................. Yes

EQP1

EQP2

E [mV]

V [mV]

Q1[2] Q2[2]

EQP titration

The titrator executes the secondEQP titration function. It determines,among other things, the mmol con-sumption Q1[2] up to the first equiv-alence point (CH3COOH), then themmol consumption Q2[2] up to thesecond equivalence point (NH4Cl).

CalculationFormula .................................. R2 = Q1[2]+QEX[1]Constant.................................Decimal places ...................... 4Result unit .............................. mmolResult name ........................... CH3COOHStatistics................................. Yes

In the second (third) Calculation func-tion, you define the mmol consump-tion for acetic acid.Here, you take into account the ti-trated excess of the first EQP titra-tion function.

In the third (fourth) Calculation func-tion you define the mmol consump-tion for NH4Cl.

Use of indices

In the first Calculation function, youdefine the mmol consumption forHCl.As you can omit the Index 1, theformula can also be R = Q.

Note: The two Dispense functions of the standard method are skipped (0 mL has been definedas volume in the method); the second Calculation function is skipped (no formula hasbeen defined in the method for the result).


8.2.1 Compilation of the symbols by indexing forms

Analysis/Resource / Symbol Unit Index ExamplesFunction

Current sample TIME [s]

Titrant c [mol/L]

t

Sensor ZERO [mV, pH ...]

SLOPE [mV/ mV, pH ...]

Sample m [g] or [mL]

M [g/mol]

z

f

Auxiliary value H H1…H20

Calculation R Xi R3C C2

Measure** E [mV, pH ...]

Temperature* T [°C, °F, K]

Dispense VDISP [mL]QDISP [mmol] X[j] QDISP[2]

EQP/EP titration ET1 [mV, pH, µA...]ET2 [mV, pH, µA...]

VEX [mL]

QEX [mmol] QEX[2]

VEND [mL]

QEND [mmol]

Use of indices

– –

EQP/EP titration (Ipol/Upol)**



Function Symbol Unit Index Examples

EQP titration neq neq[3]

P1 [mV, pH, µA...]

VP1 [mL]

QP1 [mmol]

P2 [mV, pH, µA...]

VP2 [mL]

QP2 [mmol]

EP titration VEQ [mL]

Q [mmol] Q[2]

EPOT [mV, pH, µA...]

pH/mV-stat** VTOT [mL]

QTOT [mmol]

VT1 [mL] VT1[2]

QT1 [mmol]

VT2 [mL]

QT2 [mmol]

VSTAT [mL/min]

QSTAT [mmol/min]

CSTAT

Calculation x x[3]

s

srel

EQP titration VEQ [mL]

Q [mmol] Q2[1]

EPOT [mV, pH, µA ...] EPOT1[2]

EHNV [mV, pH, µA ...]

Note: The parameters of the functions which occur only once in a method do not need anindex in "[ ]".* Temperature, Two-phase titration: Special methods;** Measure, pH/mV-stat, EQP titration (Ipol/Upol), EP titration (Ipol/Upol): two or more

of these functions are possible only with special methods.

Use of indices

X[j]

Xi[j]

(Statistics)

EQP titration(Ipol/Upol)**

EP titration (Ipol/Upol)**


EQP titration(Ipol/Upol)**



8.3 Evaluation procedures

The titrator has various evaluation procedures for precise determination of the equivalencepoints of a titration curve:

• Standard

• Minimum/maximum

• Segmented

• Asymmetric

8.3.1 Standard

You use this procedure for all S-shaped titration curves. The evaluation uses an iterativeprocedure (nonlinear regression) [1]. The titration of a strong acid with a strong base is usedas a mathematical model. With this model, the determined equivalence point always lies in thevicinity of the inflection point.

Evaluation procedures

At least five measured points aroundthe the inflection point are used for theevaluation. The slope from measuredpoint to measured point must increaseor decrease. If this condition is not met,the iterative procedure can not be em-ployed. In such a case, the inflectionpoint of the titration curve is deter-mined by interpolation. A reference tothis effect appears in the report of the"raw results".

E

V

8.3.2 Minimum/maximum

The result of this evaluation is the calculated minimum (maximum) from the measured pointsof the titration. The classical example of a titration curve with a minimum is the determinationof surfactants with photometric indication.

The minimum (maximum) is calculated by a polynomial approximation of the titration curve inthe region of the minimum (maximum). The equivalence point is recognized directly using thedata of the titration curve.

Inflection point


8.3.3 Segmented

Different indication methods (e.g. photometry, conductometry and amperometry) generatetitration curves with linear or approximately linear segments (segmented curves). The titratoralso evaluates these curves. The evaluation procedure used is based on the followingconsideration:

The first derivative of a segmentedcurve has the typical shape of an S-shaped curve, its inflection point repre-sents a good approximation of theequivalence point.

Segmented curves are evaluated withthe Standard procedure, which usesthe calculated data of the first deriva-tive instead of the data points of thetitration curve.

The equivalence point recognition isthus effected not with the calculatedfirst derivative but with the calculatedsecond derivative. The threshold forthe equivalence point recognition alsorefers to data of the second derivative.

The individual segments do not needto be exactly linear. Decisive for anaccurate determination of the equiva-lence point is the presence of a clearkink between the individual segmentsof the titration curves.

V

∆E/∆V

V

V

E

Titrierkurve

1. Ableitung

2. Ableitung

∆2E/∆V2


Titration curve

1st derivative

2nd derivative


8.3.4 Asymmetric

With pronounced asymmetric curves, the standard procedure can lead to a systematic error.The difference between the true equivalence point and the inflection point can then be greaterthan the precision normally attained. For these cases, the titrator is equipped with the evalu-ation based on the Tubbs method [2].

This empirical approximation method is a tried and tested procedure for the evaluation ofasymmetric, analog recorded titration curves. It can also be applied to titration curvesmeasured digitally. The result of the Tubbs evaluation provides a better approximation of thetrue equivalence point than the inflection point.

The evaluation procedure is based on the following considerations:


A circle of curvature with minimum radi-us can be drawn on both branches of thetitration curve. The ratio of the two radiiis determined by the asymmetry of thecurve. The mean intersection point ofthe line connecting the centers of thecircles M1 and M2 with the titration curverepresents the sought-after equivalencepoint. Theoretical calculations show thatthe true equivalence point with asym-metric titration curves always lies be-tween the inflection point and that branchof the titration curve which has the great-er curvature (the smaller radius of curva-ture).

In the titrator the calculation is implemented according to Ebel [3]. This involves approximatingthose parts of the titration curve which lie in the region of the greatest curvature by a hyperbola.The vertex is determined for each approximated hyperbola. This point on the hyperbola liesat the site of greatest curvature. The mid-points of the assigned smallest radii of curvature arethe focal points of the two hyperbolae. As in the graphical variant, the intersection point of theline connecting the two focal points with the titration curve results in the required equivalencepoint.

For the evaluation at least six measured points both before and after the inflection point of thetitration curve are required in the region of the greatest curvature. If the titration curve has aprofile which does not allow calculation of the radii of curvature, the titrator calculates theequivalence point by the standard procedure. This will be indicated in the report of the "rawresults".

[1] K. Waldmeier and W. Rellstab, Fres.Z.Anal.Chem., 264, 337, (1973)

[2] C.F. Tubbs, Anal. Chem., 26, 1670 (1954)

[3] S. Ebel, E. Glaser, R. Kantelberg and B. Reyer, Fres. Z. Anal. Chem., 312, 604 (1982)

E

V

M

M

1

2

Intersection point EQP


8.4 Examples of formulas

8.4.1 Results

R = Q ∗ C / m (standard formula) Content of a sample with weighing C = f (M, z, unit) % – ppm, – mg / g, – TAN [mg KOH / g], –

mol / kg, – mmol / g

Content of a sample solution% (g/mL), – g / L, – ppm, – mg / L, – g / 100mL,mol / L, – mmol / L

R = m / (VEQ ∗ c ∗ C) Titer determined with primary standard

Titer determined with volumetric standard

R = Q ∗ C Content per sample

R = Q mmol consumption as result

R = VEQ mL consumption as result

R = VEQ / m mL consumption per unit weight or per unit volumeas result

R = (QDISP – Q) ∗ C / m Back titration:QDISP: dispensed amount of substance in mmol ofthe Dispense functionQ: mmol consumption up to the equivalence pointor end point of an EQP or EP titration function.

R = (Q – Hj) ∗ C / m Solvent blank value included in the calculation(blank value is stored as auxiliary value Hj )

R = (Q / m – Hj) ∗ C Matrix blank value included in the calculation[mmol / g] (matrix blank value is stored as auxiliaryvalue Hj)

R = ET1 [2] Initial potential of the second EQP or EP titrationfunction as result

R = pw(–E) ∗ 1000 Ion concentration in mmol/L, measured with an ion-selective electrode

R = lg(–E) Extinction of a solution, measured as % trans-mission with a phototrode

Examples of formulas


8.4.2 Constants

Weight or volume of the sample known Unit

C = M / z mg / g or g/L

C = M / (10 ∗ z) %

C = M / (z ∗ 10 ∗ ρ) ... (ρ = density of the solution) % (g/100 mL)

C = M ∗ 1000 / z ppm (mg/kg)

C = M ∗ 1000 / (z ∗ ρ)...(ρ = density of the solution) ppm (mg / L)

C = 1 / z mol / kg (mmol / g)

C = 56.1 TAN and TBN (mg KOH / g)

C = M / (1000 ∗ z) Titer

C = 1000 mmol / L

C = 1 mol / L

Volume and weight of the sample unknown

C = M / z mg

C = 1 / z mmol



8.4.3 Formulas for restriction of the equivalence point

To calculate the titrant consumption in mmol of a particular equivalence point when a titrationcurve has several equivalence points, you can have Q identified by a condition, e.g.

R1 = Q(EPOT > -50) Titrant consumption up to the equivalence point of the 1stEQP titration function whose potential is above -50 mV. Here,the equivalence point which first meets this condition is deter-mined. Equivalence points whose potential lies between, e.g.-51 and -300 mV are not considered.

R1 = Q(EPOT > -50)[2] Titrant consumption up to the equivalence point of the 2ndEQP titration function whose potential lies above -50 mV.

R1 = Q(EPOT ~ 100)[2] Titrant consumption up to the equivalence point of the 2ndEQP titration function whose potential is nearest to 100 mV.

R1 = Q(EPOT ~ P1) Titrant consumption up to the equivalence point of the 1stEQP titration whose potential is nearest to potential P1.

R1 = Q(EPOT ~ H11) Titrant consumption up to the equivalence point of the 1stEQP titration function whose value is nearest to the valuestored under auxiliary value H11.

R1 = Q(P1 < EPOT < 300) Titrant consumption up to the equivalence point of the 1stEQP titration lying within the range of potential P1 and 300 mV.The equivalence point which first meets this condition is deter-mined.

Note: You can also define these conditions with VEQ or EPOT, e.g. R 1= EPOT(VEQ ~ 5).



8.5 Restrictions in the analysis

8.5.1 Maximum number of samples

The sample data of maximum 60 samples can be entered.

8.5.2 Maximum number of sample series in the sample data memory

DL50/DL53: Maximum 1 sample series can be entered.

DL55/DL58: Maximum 3 sample series can be entered.

8.5.3 Maximum number of equivalence points per sample determination

Per sample determination, the titrator can determine maximum 16 equivalence points (EQPtitration), divided between one or two EQP titration functions. If there are more than 16equivalence points, these will not be determined, but the determination will be continued.

8.5.4 Maximum number of measured values per Titration function

The titrator can store 300 measured values per titration function (EQP, EP, Learn, EQP (Ipol/Upol), Two-phase); it then aborts the function. With the titration functions EP (Ipol/Upol) andpH/mV-stat, the number of measured points will be reduced automatically (see Sections3.3.10 and 3.3.11).

8.5.5 Maximum number of results per sample series

The titrator can store 180 results per sample series; it then aborts the series.

Example: If you titrate 40 samples with a method, the titrator can store 4 results for eachindividual sample.

8.5.6 How long does the titrator store data?

1. Measured values of the titration functionsThe titrator stores the measured values up to the next titration function or up to the start ofthe next sample determination.

2. Raw resultsThe titrator stores all raw results up to the titration of the next sample within a series.

3. ResultsThe titrator stores all results of a sample series up to the start of a new series.

Restrictions

Error messages and malfunctions


9. Error messages and malfunctions .......................................................... 9-3

9.1 Error messages from the titrator ............................................................. 9-3

9.2 Other errors and malfunctions ................................................................ 9-6

ContentsPage



9. Error messages and malfunctions

9.1 Error messages from the titrator

You yourself can rectify all errors which the titrator displays as messages. Some of thesemessages refer to this section (errors 1...6).

However, if the EPROM or RAM test following startup of the titrator failed ("test failed"), the onlymeasure available is: "Press any key to continue". The program memory or the program datamemory is faulty.

After any key has been pressed, the titrator attempts to continue the startup process: This maybe successful, but does not necessarily guarantee 100% perfect operation.

Measure: Please contact METTLER TOLEDO service!

1. Internal ERROR: ... ← (error which should be noted down, e.g. PB, M1)

Parts of the hardware may be faulty.

Measure: – Before you contact METTLER TOLEDO service,• note the fault and the operation which initiated it,• note the instrument number of the titrator (rear panel)• print out the system information, which provides details of the titrator

equipment:– Press the shift and <F4> keys to print out the information.

• Finally, inform the service of these points and the attached peripherals withthe defined configuration.

2. Memory faulty

Parts of the user data memory are faulty.

Measure: – Call METTLER TOLEDO service to have the memory changed. Meanwhile,you can still continue working with the titrator.

3. Faulty data deleted

a. The titrator has stored only parts of a method, e.g. as the power failed during storageof this method. It deletes the entire method (it is also possible that it has deleted severalmethods). As a result, the sample data of this method which are stored in the sampledata memory will also be deleted.

Measure: – Confirm the message.– Check which of your methods have been deleted and reenter.



3 b. The titrator has stored only parts of parameters of a resource, e.g. as the power failedduring storage of these parameters. It deletes the entire list of this resource (e.g. alltitrants or all sensors).

Measure: – Confirm the message.The titrator now loads the default list of the deleted resource, e.g. alltitrants stored in the titrator in the factory.

– Check which list has been changed:If the user data memory has insufficient storage space, only the titrantswhich can be accommodated in the available space will be stored.If the memory is full, the titrator will not store any titrants. In such a case,you must delete data of other resources or one of your methods to creatememory space.

– Switch the titrator off then on again.– Check that all resources are again available.

If the error messages appears repeatedly, inform METTLER TOLEDO service!

4. Storage not possible

a. The titrator can not assign the titer, the auxiliary value or the calibration data to thecorresponding resources as the list is missing (titrant, sensors or auxiliary values).

Measure: – Confirm the message.– Check whether the list of the resource has been deleted.– Switch the titrator off then on again: The titrator will then reload the default

list of the corresponding resource, e.g. all the titrants which were storedin the titrator in the factory.If the user data memory has insufficient storage space, only the titrantswhich can fit in the available space will be stored.If the memory is full, the titrator will not store any titrants. In such a case,you must delete other resources or one of your methods to createstorage space.

– Switch the titrator off then on again.– Check that all resources are again available.

b. The titrator can no longer store, e.g. data as the user data memory is full. This ispossible• with resources which you wish to add in the Setup menu• in the case of a method you generate in the Method menu• with sample data you wish to enter in the Sample menu• on storage of a changed, active method• on storage of the evaluation parameters of the titration functions EQP, EQP (Ipol,

Upol) and Two-phase of an active method (parameter: "Stop for reevaluation").



Measure: – Confirm the message.– Delete methods or resource data or copy to a memory card.

4 c. The titrator performs a learn titration. If the method for this is stored on the memorycard or in the computer, the parameters of the function are not stored.

Measure: – Confirm the message.– Always perform a learn titration with a method stored in the titrator and

do not remote-control the titrator!

If the error message appears repeatedly, contact METTLER TOLEDO service!

5. Error: Memory carda. An error appears during copying.

Measure: – Confirm the message.– Check that the card is inserted properly and restart the copying process.– If the process is aborted again, reformat the memory card and attempt

to repeat the copying process (the data on the card will be deleted).– If the process is again aborted, use a new memory card.

b. An error appears when a memory copy is loaded.

Measure: – Confirm the message.– Check that the card is inserted properly and restart the copying process.– If the process is again aborted, switch the titrator off then on again.– Use a new memory card.

6. Measuring inputs not adjusted (refers only to a pH option on which the calibrationdata are not stored, see Section 6.7.2).

The calibration data for the characteristic line of the measuring inputs are missing.

Measure: – Enter the data from the data sheet enclosed with the pH option (see Section6.7.2).

When the measuring inputs are adjusted, this message appears if system data have beendeleted in the user data memory.

Measure: – Switch titrator off then on again: the system data will be reloaded.– Reenter zero point and slope for all measuring inputs.



9.2 Other errors and malfunctions

The following compilation of errors and malfunctions are not reported by the titrator and mayfrequently help you rectify the faults yourself without the need to contact METTLER TOLEDOservice.

If you have to contact the service, please print out the system information to obtain details ofthe titrator equipment and pass these data on to the service:

– Press the Shift and <F4> keys to print out the information.

Fault Possible cause Rectification

No display on titrator Titrator not connected to power Connect to power supply,supply if fault persists contact

METTLER TOLEDO Service

Several points of the display Contact METTLER TOLEDOmissing Service

Display does not match the Contact METTLER TOLEDOpressed key Service

Stirrer does not rotate Stirrer not properly assembled Check stirrer and seating ofor sensors block it at the the sensorstitration stand

Transfer error to attached Peripheral faulty or switched Check attached device isperipheral off functioning properly

Device (printer, balance, Device not switched on Switch on deviceterminal) at Centronics orRS interface do not react Wrong settings Settings and

Configuration (switch settings) configuration must matchwrong (see Section 2.7)

Burette does not move to Burette drive faulty Contact METTLER TOLEDOzero position when switched on service

Wrong potential or Electrode faulty Check electrode (seepH values electrode data sheet)

Calibration data wrong Check defined data

Use new electrode

No dispensing, the titrant Burette tip clogged Clean burette tipis discharged from stopcockor piston Follower cam on burette Insert follower cam correctly

mounted wrongly (see Section 10.2.3)


Installation and maintenance Installation and maintenance

10. Installation and maintenance ......................................................................10-3

10.1 Installing the burette drive ..........................................................................10-3

10.2 Installing and maintaining the interchangeable burette ...........................10-4

10.2.1 The DV1001, DV1005, DV1010, DV1020 burettes ........................................10-4

10.2.2 Equipping the burette .....................................................................................10-5

10.2.3 Inserting the burette .......................................................................................10-6

10.2.4 Maintaining the burette parts..........................................................................10-7

10.2.5 General information........................................................................................10-8

10.3 Equipping the titration stand ......................................................................10-9

10.4 Rear view of the titrator .............................................................................10-10

10.5 Installing the sensor, Centronics or RS option .......................................10-1110.5.1 Calibration data for the characteristic curve of the measuring inputs ..........10-12

10.6 Inserting the memory card ........................................................................10-12

10.7 Using TTL inputs and outputs ..................................................................10-13

10.8 Attaching a keyboard .................................................................................10-1510.8.1 Attaching a bar-code reader.........................................................................10-16

10.9 Configuration of the terminal (DEC VT340) .............................................10-16

ContentsPage


Installation and maintenance

10. Installation and maintenance

– Switch the titrator off and disconnect the power cable before you open thehousing! An electric shock could be lethal.

– You can clean the housing of the titrator with a cloth moistened with ethanol.

10.1 Installing the burette drive

Burette drive

– Unscrew the burette guide at position 2.

– Pull out the ribbon cable that is located in the titratorbelow this second opening.

NotePlease place the burette drive on the second opening.

DL50/DL53The burette drive is defined as the middle position by the software(drive 2), in other words you can not control a drive installed atposition 1.

DL55/DL58For the first titration, which you perform in accordance with theinstructions in the Quick Guide, the 2nd burette drive is defined.

– Plug the coupling of the ribbon cable in the connectorof the burette drive.

– Position the burette drive on the second opening ofthe titrator – from the first opening press the ribboncable downward at an angle (ensure it is not pinched!)– and fasten with the screw.

– Screw the burette guide to the first opening.

DL55/DL58If you wish to use a second burette drive, follow theabove procedure:

– Unscrew the burette guide at position 1 etc.

Screw

Connector

Ribbon cable

Position 2

Coupling

Ribbon cable



10.2 Installing and maintaining the interchangeable burette

10.2.1 The DV1001, DV1005, DV1010, DV1020 burettes

The 5, 10 and 20 mL burettes differ only in the size of their cylinder, centering ring and piston,whereas the 1 mL burette has a different construction: its piston is longer, piston guide andcylinder holder ''replace'' the centering ring of the other burettes. Instead of the locking screw,its glass cylinder is fastened with an O-ring and a knurled nut.

1 mL burette 5 / 10 / 20 mL burette

Interchangeable burette

Locking screw

Knurled nut

O-ring

Glass cylinder

Cylinder holder

Burette housing

Protection tube

Connection tubing

Stop-cock

Stop-cock

Piston rod

Piston

Piston guide

Centeringring

PistonLip seals

Piston rod


Installation and maintenance Interchangeable burette

10.2.2 Equipping the burette

– Lay gasket on bottle and screw on burette holder.

– Insert stopper (or a drying tube with holder).

Caution: If you use a stopper as protection for the titrant, always use the stopper with flatside! Otherwise a partial vacuum forms in the bottle (order no. 23646).

– Push suction tubing into the bottle, slide the red PVC tubing over the fitting as kink protection,and fasten other end to left connection of burette head.

– Screw dispensing tubing into connection at right and place burette tip in tip holder.

Buretteassembled

Burette holder

1 L bottle

Stopper

Dispensing tube

Tipholder

Fitting

Gasket

Suction tube



10.2.3 Inserting the burette

2

3

1

NoteBefore sliding the burette onto the titrator,check the exact position of the stopcock andthe piston rod.

If the piston has been pushed too far into thecylinder, carefully take it out a short way. Thenpress the burette onto the burette holder thuspositioning the piston exactly. Piston mustproject 7 mm!

– Slide the burette onto burette drive 2 withthe stop of arrestment knob (1) located onleft side.

– Check that piston rod (2) is correctly posi-tioned in push rod (3).

– Fix burette by turning the arrestment knobto the right.


Position of thevalve

Position of thepiston



10.2.4 Maintaining the burette parts

Depending on the titrant, you should clean the burette cylinder, piston, stopcock and tubingrelatively often.

– Slide the burette off the titrator, invert it so that the stopcock points towards you and carefullytake out the piston; this causes the burette contents to flow out through the suction tubing(waste or titrant bottle!).

– In the same position, turn the stopcock through 90° clockwise and any liquid in the stopcockwill flow out through the dispensing tubing (waste bottle!).

– Unscrew the suction, dispensing and connection tubing.

1 mL burette

– Unscrew the knurled screw of the buretteand remove the O-ring from the glass cylin-der using tweezers.

– Unscrew the holder of the glass cylinderand take out the cylinder.Caution: Do not misplace O-ring!

5, 10, or 20 mL burette

– Unscrew the locking screw of the buretteand take out the glass cylinder.Caution: Do not misplace the centering

ring of the burette housing!

– Press the cam of the stopcock inward andlift the stopcock up and out.

• Depending on the contamination caused by the titrant, rinse cylinder and tubing with acidsor deionized H2O then with ethanol and finally dry the parts with oil-free compressed air orvacuum.

• Rinse the stopcock with solvents or deionized H2O only! Then dry it with oil-free com-pressed air.

• Never place O-rings in organic solvents!

• Never attempt to remove any crystals in the cylinder by scratching with a hard object! Pipecleaners or Q tips™ are more suitable.

• Never put the parts in a drying oven whose temperature is above 40 °C!

– Replace the piston if it leaks or is badly scored at the edge. Pay special attention to crystalformation between the lip seals of the piston if you work with NaOH/KOH and KF solutions!


Cam



10.2.5 General information

You can remove air bubbles at the piston surface by taking the burette out of the guide andlightly tapping its base. This causes air bubbles to rise to the top. Then rinse the burette.

You can remove air bubbles in the tubes by tapping the tubes with your fingers while titrant isbeing siphoned off or dispensed. If this does not help, undo the suction tube so that titrant flowsback into the bottle, screw it on again and rinse the burette (air purging). In obstinate casesundo both tubes, rinse with deionized H2O and ethanol and dry using oil-free compressed airor vacuum.

Titrants such as KMnO4 or KOH in MeOH can easily crystallize in the tip of the burette and blockit. If you have no immediate use for a titrant, it is best to empty and clean the dispensing tube:Unscrew connection to let the titrant flow out. Check the threaded connection and wipe off anydrops.

KF titrants are subject to outgassing, above all at elevated room temperatures (SO2), whichleads to the formation of air bubbles in the tubes and in the burette (stopcock). You should thusrinse these burettes before titrations!




10.3 Equipping the titration stand

Titration stand

– Screw on titration arm (1) with nurledscrew (2).

– Insert stirring rod (3) and attach pro-peller stirrer (4) from below to rod.

– Press spacing ring (5) onto titrationhead, place clamping ring (6) inthreaded ring (7) and screw intoplace.

– To install a titration vessel, turn thethreaded ring half a turn to the left,attach the vessel and tighten thread-ed ring.

– Insert burette tip (8) and electrode(9) diagonally opposed – this en-sures better control in the titration –and close the remaining openingswith stoppers (11 & 12).

(9a) is the plug-in electrode cable.

(10): This opening is intended for therinsing bottle connection.

(13) is the electrode holder.

– Always test the titration vessel for firm seating in the titration head! If it fallsoff, you could injure yourself if working with toxic titrants and solvents orstrong acids or bases.

1

2

13

8

3

9a

9

12

11

7

6

5

4

10



The diagram shows a possible occupancy of all slots. The basic version of the titrator has thefollowing installed• a pH option at slot No. 1• an Centronics option at slot No. 4.

pH and KF optionsYou can install a sensor option in any slot. Each option has a number which is also affixed tothe data sheet enclosed with each sensor option (see Section 10.5.1).

DL53/55/58: You can use the inputs and outputs of maximum four sensor options, e.g. two pHoptions at slot No. 1 and 2, two KF options at slot No. 3 and 4.

DL50: You can use the inputs and outputs of maximum one sensor option.

Centronics option

You can use the Centronics option only if it is installed in slot No. 4. The TTL inputs and outputsof the socket can be used only for the commands preallocated by the titration software (seeSection 10.7).

Rear view

10.4 Rear view of the titrator

No. 1 No. 2 No. 3 No. 4

Stirrer outputs:Stirrer 1Stirrer 2

Analog outputs

Input:Reference electrode

Sensor inputs:Sensor 1Sensor 2

Temperature sensorinput: Temp 1

RS232 interface for system

RS232 interface for sample changer

TTLIO socket

RS232 interface for balance

On/offswitch

Connector forpower cable

Slot:

TTLIO socket (used by titrator)

Centronics interface for printer

pH KF RS Centronics option


Installation and maintenance Installing options

RS optionsYou can install an RS option either in slot No. 3 or slot No. 4. Although the options are identical,the functions of the connections are not!

Slot No. 3: You can freely control the TTL inputs and outputs of the socket.

To the upper RS interface you can attach only a sample changer,to the lower only a computer or a terminal.

Slot No. 4: You can use the TTL inputs and outputs of the socket only for the commandsstipulated by the titration software (see Section 10.7).

To the upper RS interface you can attach only a balance,to the lower only a printer.

10.5 Installing the sensor, Centronics or RS option

– Switch the titrator off and disconnect the power cable before you unscrewthe cover plate of the slot! An electric shock could be fatal.

143

2

Soldering scheme

Shield

Pt100/Pt1000 sensor

2. To attach temperature sensors of other companies, youcan use a Lemo cable plug (4-pin) and solder on theappropriate cable (see Section 11.2: Accessories).

– Unscrew the cover plate of the slot.

– Insert the option in the two guide rails, push in option andfasten with the two screws.

Notes

1. When you have installed a pH option that has not storedthe calibration data you should• enter the calibration data for the characteristic line of the

measuring inputs (see Section 10.5.1).• calibrate the electrodes/temperature sensors at the new

inputs (see Sections 2.2 and 6.1.3).



10.5.1 Calibration data for the characteristic curve of the measuring inputs

When the titrator is delivered, the measuring inputs are calibrated for a sensor and temperaturesensor (Pt100 and Pt1000) of the pH option. The data sheet filed in Section 14 documents thedata for the characteristic line of the measuring inputs of this pH option.

If the data are not stored on the actual option, you must reenter them (see Section 6.7.2)• if system data are lost (see Section 9.1)• if you install this option in a different slot.

If you order an additional pH option, you receive a data sheet with the number of the optionand the calibration data for its measuring inputs. You must enter these data for correct potentialand temperature measurements if they are not stored on the actual option (see Section 6.7.2).

The data for the characteristic line of the measuring inputs are always stored on KF options!

Note: As the characteristic line of the measuring inputs can exhibit long-term drift, we adviseyou to have the inputs recalibrated every 2 years by METTLER TOLEDO Service.

10.6 Inserting the memory card

Note: Ensure that you are not electrostatically charged when you perform this operation! Werecommend you touch the metallic part of the titrator housing before you insert thememory card to ensure the charge is not transferred to the titrator interior.

Memory card

– Swing open the cover (1) of the slot for thememory card.

– Push in the memory card until knob (2) springsout.

– To remove the card, press the knob back in.

1 2


Installation and maintenance TTLIO

10.7 Using TTL inputs and outputs

The TTLIO socket of the Centronics option has two inputs and four outputs (In 1/In 2 andOut 1...Out 4). These are assigned by the titrator to commands which are triggered during ananalysis. You can wire these inputs and outputs mechanically or electronically to trigger thedefined commands by auxiliary units or systems (see following examples).

The RS option has the same TTLIO socket as the Centronics option. When it is installed in slot3, the inputs and outputs are always available and freely configurable (see Sections 6.7.5 and6.7.6). At slot 4, they are assigned by the titrator to commands which you trigger during ananalysis:

Socket Assignment (see Section 12.10.2: Technical data)

8

7

12

3

4

56

GND (Pin 1) ...... signal ground

In 1 (Pin 2) ........ triggers the start of the analysis or confirms the mask"Current sample" (titration stand 1, 2 or external)

In 2 (Pin 3) ........ triggers the abort of the analysis (Reset)

Out 1 (Pin 4) ..... gives a pulse after the sample function

Out 2 (Pin 5) ..... the output signal assumes a "low" status during thetitration; this does not change until the sample is ana-lyzed (on display of the result list)

Out 3 (Pin 6) ..... the output signal assumes a "low" status in the case of anerror message; this does not change until the messagehas been confirmed with OK

VCC (Pin 7) ...... supply voltage

Out 4 (Pin 8) ..... on request for the next sample of a series, this triggers apulse (only with titration stand 1, 2 or external)

In

GND

Event sensor

Wiring mechanically

If you wire, e.g. pin 1 (ground) with pin 2 (input 1) byattaching a manual event sensor, you can initiate thestart of the analysis with this switch. The mask"Defined are" must be blocked from the analysissequence for this as it can not be confirmed (seeSection 6.7.3).



Wiring electronicallyInput In 1 or In 2 Output Out 1, Out 2, Out 3 or Out 4

Titrator external

Out

VCCRelay

Titrator

Out

Relay

GND

+–

external

Titrator external

In

GND

Output Out 1, Out 2, Out 3 or Out 4Relay supply internal Relay supply external(relay operate voltage: max. 3.5 V);Icc: max. 60 mA

Note: TTL are signals which do not transfer power. To operate, e.g. a pump it is necessaryto connect an amplifier in the circuit.

TTLIO

Titrator

GND

Out

GND

external



10.8 Attaching a keyboard

A DIN socket is located on the left side of the titrator and can be used for the attachment of anexternal keyboard for alphanumeric entries.

– Attach the keyboard using the appropriate DIN cable (see Section 12.10: Technical data).

The following table shows the keys and key combinations which correspond to the command,menu, auxiliary function and entry keys of the titrator:

Titrator External keyboard

key key <Alt> + key <Ctrl>+ key

F1 F1F2 F2F3 F3F4 F4F5 F5

Setup F12Method F10Sample F11Run F9

Sensor eStirrer sChanger cBurette bResults rReport pMisc... mData Transfer d

Reset Break (Pause)Arrow key ∆ / Shift + ∆ ↑ / Page upArrow key ∇ / Shift + ∇ ↓ / Page down

Shift Shift1...9, . 1...9, . (b)1...9 (a)1...9Del DelCE (Shift + Del) Shift + Del

The characters /, -, +, =, etc., which are written with the Shift key, depend on the assignmentof the keyboard. Additional characters not on the titrator keypad are:

x → <Alt Gr> + x µ → <Alt Gr> + u ∆ → <Alt Gr> + d

External keyboard


Installation and maintenanceBar-code reader/terminal

10.8.1 Attaching a bar-code reader

You can attach a bar-code reader to the external keyboard. To ensure this is recognized bythe titrator, you must program a "header" and "terminator" with the external keyboard (seeOperating Instructions of the keyboard in question). The titrator requires the key sequence"Shift"/"Enter" for both parameters.

You can then read in, e.g. the bar code for the sample identification without having to definethe bar-code reader in the Setup menu.

You must define the bar-code reader if you wish to use it for direct data transfer to a computer(see Section 2.7.3).

10.9 Configuration of the terminal (DEC VT340)

You have attached the terminal to the titrator and defined it (see Section 2.7.3). To configureit, proceed as follows:

– Switch off the titrator.

– Switch on the terminal and wait until the message VT340 OK appears.

– Press the Set-Up key: The SET-UP DIRECTORY appears.

a. If you have already configured the terminal for other connections, first select RecallFactory Default Settings to reactivate the default settings.

b. If you have not yet used the terminal, you can change some of the default parametersdirectly.

– Select General Set-UP and change the following parameters:

Terminal mode VT300-8bit

– Select Display Set-Up and change the following parameters:

Scrolling jump

Status Display host writable

– Select Communications Set-Up and change the following parameters:

Transmit Speed 9600 *

Receive XOFF Point 512

Character Format 8 bits, even parity *

* These parameters must match the defined terminal set-tings! (See Section 2.7.3)

– Select Keyboard Set-Up and change the following parameters:

Keypad mode numeric, so that the numeric keys of the numeric key field (onextreme right of keyboard) are active.



– Select Save Current Settings to save the modified parameters.

– Press the Set-Up key to quit the SET-UP DIRECTORY.

– Switch on the titrator: The terminal screen is now built up by the titrator.

If you have switched off both instruments,

– first switch on the terminal, then the titrator.

You can use the keyboard of the terminal to operate the titrator. The keys have the followingassignments:

Titrator Terminal

key key numeric key field

F1 F6F2 F7F3 F8F4 F9F5 F10

Setup F14Method F12Sample F13Run F11

Sensor 8Stirrer 5Changer 4Burette 7Results 3Report 2Misc... 1Data Transfer 6

Reset F20Arrow key ∆ / Shift + ∆ ↑ / Prev. screenArrow key ∇ / Shift + ∇ ∇ ∇ ↓ / Next screen

Shift Shift1...9, . 1...9, .Del RemoveShift + ←Shift + →

Terminal

∆

∆

Accessories


ContentsPage

11. Accessories ..................................................................................................11-3

11.1 Standard equipment ....................................................................................11-4

Small accessories .......................................................................................... 11-6

11.2 Optional accessories ...................................................................................11-7Burette drive ................................................................................................... 11-7

Interchangeable burettes ............................................................................... 11-7

Additional parts for the burette ....................................................................... 11-9

Titration stands ............................................................................................... 11-9

Additional parts for the titration stand........................................................... 11-11

Sensors ........................................................................................................ 11-13

Temperature sensors ................................................................................... 11-15

Accessories for Karl-Fischer titrations.......................................................... 11-15

Peripherals ................................................................................................... 11-16

Titration software .......................................................................................... 11-16

Miscellaneous .............................................................................................. 11-17

Options ......................................................................................................... 11-19

Documentation ............................................................................................. 11-19

11.3 METTLER TOLEDO literature and application brochures ...................... 11-20

Accessories


11. Accessories

All instrument components of and working aids for the titrator that form part of

• the standard equipment and

• the optional accessoriesare listed below.

Each part that is listed with an order number can be ordered from METTLER TOLEDO.

Accessories


11.1 Standard equipment

Rondolino(DL50 Rondolino only)

Interchangeable burette(DL50 Graphix/DL50 Rondolino only)

Propeller stirrer

Titration stand(DL50 Graphix only)

Electrode holder(DL53/DL55/DL58 only)

Burette drive

Accessories


DL53DL50 DL50 DL55

Graphix Rondolino DL58

Titration stand x

Rondolino x

Electrode holder x

Burette drive DV90 x x x

Interchangeable burette(10 mL) DV1010* x* x*

Propeller stirrerincl. 2 stirring rods x x x

pH option x x x

Centronics option x x x

RS option x x x

Titration Software LabX light x x x

Power cable x x x

Electrode cable x x x

Printer cable x x x

RS connection cable x x x

Reference Handbook x x x

Quick Guide x x x

Memo card x x x

Application broschure No. 12 x x x

Small accessories (see next page)

* see optional accessories

Accessories


DL53DL50 DL50 DL55

(Order No.) Graphix Rondolino DL58

2 knurled screws (25650) x x x

Threaded ring (25652) x

Clamping ring (25653) x

Spacing ring (23842) x

Titration vessel (Set) x x

2 electrode holder (25654) x x x

3 stoppers ST 14.5 (23451) x x x

2 stoppers ST 7.5 (23452) x x x

Stopper holder (25662) x x x

Phillips screwdriver No. 2 (73072) x x x

Operating Instructions LabX light x x x

Small accessories

Accessories


11.2 Optional accessories

The numbers enclosed in parentheses refer to the purchase order, e.g. of an interchangeableburette. In case of additional orders some parts are available only in multipack form or as aminimum quantity.

Order No.Burette drive

Burette drive DV90

Interchangeable burettes

Interchangeable burette, complete 1 mL DV10015 mL DV1005

10 mL DV101020 mL DV1020

comprising:1 L brown glass bottle (1) 71296

andBurette holder (1) 23645

andPiston (1) DV1001 51107535

DV1005 51107115DV1010 51107116DV1020 51107117

Accessories


Order No.andStopcock (1) with valve disk1) made of:PTFE (light-gray) (standard equipment of interchangeable burette) 51107537ceramic (dark-brown) (optional accessories) 511075251) Both valve disks are chemically resistant. For 24-hour use with titrants thathave a tendency to cristallize out, we recommend the ceramic disk.

andLight protection tube (1) 23644

andDispensing tube (1) with siphon tip 0.70 m 25687

andSuction tube (1) 0.83 m 25688

andGasket (1) min. order quantity: 5 23981for 1 L brown glass bottle

andTip holder (1) for burette tip 23960

andStopper ST 14.5 (1) min. order quantity: 5 23646

andSet of labels (1) 51107506HCl

c= mol/LDate:

HClc= mol/LDate:

NaOHc= mol/LDate:

AgNO3

c= mol/LDate:

c= mol/LDate:

c= mol/LDate:

c= mol/LDate:

c= mol/LDate:

c= mol/LDate:

c= mol/LDate:

c= mol/LDate:

c= mol/LDate:

c= mol/LDate:

c= mol/LDate:

c= mol/LDate:

c= mol/LDate:

c= mol/LDate:

c= mol/LDate:

c= mol/LDate:

c= mol/LDate:

c= mol/LDate:

c= mol/LDate:

c= mol/LDate:

c= mol/LDate:

c= mol/LDate:

c= mol/LDate:

c= mol/LDate:

c= mol/LDate:

c= mol/LDate:

c= mol/LDate:

c= mol/LDate:

c= mol/LDate:

c= mol/LDate:

c= mol/LDate:

c= mol/LDate:

c= mol/LDate:

c= mol/LDate:

c= mol/LDate:

c= mol/LDate:

c= mol/LDate:

c= mol/LDate:

c= mol/LDate:

c= mol/LDate:

c= mol/LDate:

c= mol/LDate:

c= mol/LDate:

c= mol/LDate:

c= mol/LDate:

c= mol/LDate:

c= mol/LDate:

c= mol/LDate:

c= mol/LDate:

c= mol/LDate:

c= mol/LDate:

1/2 H2SO4

c= mol/LDate:

1/2 H2SO4

c= mol/LDate:

KFc= mg H2O/mLDate:

NaOHc= mol/LDate:

AgNO3

c= mol/LDate:

KFc= mg H2O/mLDate:

Accessories


Order No.

Additional parts for the burette

Dispensing tube with siphon tip 1.00 m 25961

Drying tube with cover 23961

Drying tube holder 23915

Molecular sieves 250 g 71478

Siphon tip set set of 5 23240

Adapter for bottles of: Merck, DE 23774Fisher, US 23787

Bottle rack for two 1-liter 51107065bottles with burettes

Titration stands

Titration stand, complete 51108760

Dual titration stand, complete DV92

Accessories


Order No.

Titration stands 51108760 DV92comprising:

Angle bracket (1) x 25655

Propeller stirrer x 51109150incl. 2 stirring rods

Titration arm (1) x x 25651

Spacing ring (1) x x 23842

Clamping ring (1) x x 25653

Threaded ring (1) x x 25652

Knurled screw (2) x 25650

Electrode holder (2) x 25654min. order quantity: 5

Stopper ST 14.5 (3) x 23451min. order quantity: 5

Stopper ST 7.5 (2) x 23452min. order quantity: 5

Titration vessel 100 mL x x 101974polypropylene (2)set of 1400

Accessories


Order No.

Additional parts for the titration stand

Titration vessel 100 mL set of 1400 25777polypropylene, red colored

Titration vessel 80 mL, glass set of 20 101446

Titration vessel 250 mL, glass set of 10 23515

Titration vessel 5-20 mL, glass 23516

Titration vessel for two-phase titration 51107655incl. stop cock, threaded ring and gasket

Thermostatable titration vessel 80 mL, glass 23517

Plastic cover for titration vessels set of 16 101448

Heat exchanger for thermostating 23834incl. adapter with taper joint

Gas inlet 23721

Rinsing unit, complete 23821with titration head insert and stoppersfor unused openings in titration head1 set of stoppers for rinsing unit 101230

Electrode holder 51108730

Accessories


Order No.

Propeller stirrer 51109150incl. 2 stirring rods

Propeller stirring rod 101229

Micropropeller stirring rod 655073(for titration vessel 23516)

Adapter cable 0.50 m 51107216(mini DIN male / RCA female)

Peristaltic pump SP250 51108016with Novoprene tubes, adapters, hose clamps

Novoprene tubes (1x 1 m + 10x 120 mm) 51190969Fluorosilicone elastomer tubes (5x 120 mm) 51108149for SP250

Diaphragm pump 51108012incl. suction tube

Heating system DH100110 V 51108779230 V 51108780

Dispensing unit DU200EU version 51370200US version 51370210

Accessories


Order No.

Sensors

Combined pH electrode for DG111-SCtitrations in aqueous solutions

Combined pH electrode for small volumes DG101-SCin small titration vessels in aqueous solutions

Combined glass electrode with movable sleeve DG113-SCfrit for titrations in nonaqueous solutions

Combined glass electrode with movable sleeve DG114-SCfrit for titrations in aqueous solutions

Combined glass electrode with sleeve DG115-SCfrit for titrations in aqueous solutions

Combined platinum ring electrode for DM140-SCredox titrations

Combined silver ring electrode for DM141-SCargentometric titrations

Accessories


Order No.

Ion selective measuring electrodes• Fluoride ISE DX219 51089931• Chloride ISE DX235 51089933• Nitrate ISE DX262 51089934• Sodium ISE DX223 51089930• Potassium ISE DX239 51089932• Lithium ISE DX207 51107673• Ammonia GSE DX217 51107677• Ammonium ISE DX218 51107679• Magnesium ISE DX224 51107684• Cyanide ISE DX226 51107681• Sulfide ISE DX232 51107675• Calcium ISE DX240 51107683• Bromide ISE DX280 51107671• Fluoroborate ISE DX287 51107676• Silver ISE DX308 51107682• Cadmium ISE DX312 51107672• Iodide ISE DX327 51107680• Barium ISE DX337 51107674• Surfactant sensitive electrode DS500 51107670

Reference electrode for• ion selective electrodes DX200 51089935• surfactant sensitive electrodes Inlab 301 52000128

Triaxial cable (Electrode cable with LEMO connector)Cable SC-LEMO-60 0.60 m 89601Cable SC-LEMO-100 1.00 m 89602Cable SC-LEMO-160 1.60 m 51108034

Phototrode (incl. power supply unit) DP5for color-indicated titrationsTransmission measurementat 555, 660, 520, 620, 590 nm

Adapter cable1) (DIN-LEMO) for 89600attachment of electrodes or phototrodewith DIN connector to the titrator1) If sensors with DIN connectors are attached via the adapter cable to the titrator,

the advantages offered by the triaxial cable – high level of protection againstelectrostatic interference – are in part lost. In the case of sensors with a very highresistance, e.g. DG113 in nonaqueous solutions, we advise against use of theadapter cable.

Accessories


Order No.

Temperature sensors

Pt1000 sensor DT1000

Lemo cable connector (4 pin) 88321for temperature sensors (non-METTLER)

Accessories for Karl-Fischer titrations

KF option 51107269

Double-pin platinum electrode DM143-SC

Electrode cable (SC/Banana) 1.00 m 51108061

External titration stand DV705

Thermostatable beaker 51107497(for KF titration vessel)

Stand rod 51107495

Accessories


Order No.

Peripherals

METTLER TOLEDO balances with data output AG, AM, PM, ATAX, AB, PB, PR, XP

Printer DIN A4 / US Letter on request

Printer RS-P42

TBox (control of external devices via TTLIO) DR42

Sample changer Rondolino

Sample changer Rondo 60

Connection cable for Rondolino or TBox 51107424

Connection cable for Rondo 60 51108304

Titration software

- LabX pro titration (for Windows 2000/XP)- Instrument licenses for Titrators

GA42 Printer

17.375 g

19.319 g

8.003 g

7.773 g

6.554 g

10.506 g

8.097 g

5.876 g

3.205 g

1.098 g

METTLER TOLEDO

OUT 1

OUT 2

OUT 3

OUT 4

IN 1

IN 2

ON

OUT 1 OUT 2

OUT 3

OUT 4

TBox DR42

100-240 V50/60 Hzunfusedmax. 9 A

24 VDC 1.2 A

Accessories


Order No.

Miscellaneous

Keypad cover set of 3 51107667

Adapter cable 0.23 m 25914(banana sockets-DIN connector)

Memory card (Flash type, 2 MB) 51107230

Dongle for software updates, DL53 ⇒ DL55 51107210upgrading the titrator DL53 ⇒ DL55+ 51107211and special methods DL53 ⇒ DL53+ 51107212

DL55 ⇒ DL55+ 51107213DL53 ⇒ DL58 51107275DL55 ⇒ DL58 51107276

Connection cable: Centronics option

Connection cable for AM, PM, AT balances 229029(D sub 9-pin female, 15-pin male)

Connection cable for AX balances 11101051

Connection cable for balances with Option 011 59759(D sub 9-pin female, 25-pin male)

Connection cable for AG, AB, PB, PR balances 229065(LC-RS9 cable)

Connection cable for SARTORIUS balances 51190363(D sub 9-pin female, 25-pin male)

Memory Cardfor DL53 and DL55

USER DATA ME-

5110

7230

Accessories


Order No.

Connection cable: RS option

Connection cable for AM, PM, AT balances 51107196

Connection cable for balances with Option 5110719503 and 011 (RS8 male, D sub 25-pin male)

Connection cable for AG, AB, PB, PR balances(LC-RS8 cable) 229185

Connection cable for SARTORIUS balances 200495(RS8 male, D sub 25-pin male)

Connection cable (RS232C) for printer 200495(RS8 male, D sub 25-pin female)

Connection cable (RS232C) for GA42 printer 201508(DTE, 9-pin female)

Connection cable (RS232C) for computer(DTE, 9-pin female) 201508

Connection cable (RS232C) for computer/terminal(DTE, 25-pin female) 201507

Accessories


Order No.

Options

RS option: 2 RS232C interfaces (DCE) 51107172plus 1 TTLIO socket

Centronics option: 1 Centronics and 511072891 RS232C interface plus 1 TTLIO socket

KF option: 2 inputs for polarized electrode, 1 stirrer 51107269output and 1 analog output

pH option: One input each for reference electrode, 51107152sensor, temperature sensor plus stirrer andanalog output

Documentation

Reference Handbook • German 51709613• English 51709614• French 51709615

Quick Guide • German 51709616• English 51709617• French 51709618• Spanish 51709619• Italian 51709620

Memo card • German 51709621• English 51709622• French 51709623• Spanish 51709624• Italian 51709625

Application Brochure (No. 12) • German 51724764• English 51724765

Computer Interface • German 51709495Description • English 51709496

Accessories


11.3 METTLER TOLEDO literature and application brochures

Basics of Titration 51725008Basiswissen in der Titration 51725007

Fundamentals of Titration 704153Grundlagen der Titration 704152Bases du Titrage 704154

Guide to pH Measurement 51300047Anleitung zur pH-Bestimmung 51300058

Guide to Ion Selective Measurement 51300075Anleitung zur ionenselektiven Messung 51300201

Guide to Conductivity and Dissolved Oxygen 51724716Anleitung zur Leitfähigkeits- und Sauerstoffmessung 51724715Guide de mésure da la conductivité et de l'oxygène dissous 51724717

DL5x Application Brochure 12 (30 Selected Applications for DL5x Titrators) 51724765DL5x Applikationsbroschüre 12 (30 ausgewählte Applikationen für DL5x Titratoren) 51724764

DL5x Application Brochure 22 (Surfactant Titration) 51725015DL5x Applikationsbroschüre 22 (Titration von Tensiden) 51725014

DL5x / DL7x Application Brochure 29 (Rondo 60 Sample Changer) 51710082

Memory Card Application package for METTLER TOLEDO Titrators DL53/DL55/DL58 51107233Memory Card and Application Brochure 18 (51724917): Standardization of Titrants

Memory Card Applikationssammlung für METTLER TOLEDO Titratoren DL53/DL55/DL58: 51107234Speicherkarte und Applikationsbroschüre 18 (51724916): Titerbestimmungen

Memory Card Application package for METTLER TOLEDO Titrators DL53/DL55/DL58 51107235Memory Card and Application Brochure 19 (51725012): Determinations in Beverages

Memory Card Applikationssammlung für METTLER TOLEDO Titratoren DL53/DL55/DL58: 51107236Speicherkarte und Applikationsbroschüre 19 (51725013): Getränkebestimmungen

Memory Card Application package for METTLER TOLEDO Titrators DL53/DL55/DL58 51107237Memory Card and Application Brochure 17 (51724915): Pulp and Paper Industry

Memory Card Application package for METTLER TOLEDO Titrators DL53/DL55/DL58 51107238Memory Card and Application Brochure 20 (51725020): Petroleum Industry

Accessories


We have developed applications for the METTLER TOLEDO DL770, DL67, DL70ES and DL77 Titrators, whichhave a method concept similar to that of the DL50, DL53, DL55 and DL 58 series. You will find these useful whendefining the parameters of your method functions.

DL70 Application Brochure 1 (18 Customer Methods) 724492DL70 Applikationsbroschüre 1 (18 Kundenapplikationen) 724491

DL70 Application Brochure 2 (Various Methods) 724557DL70 Applikationsbroschüre 2 (Verschiedene Beispiele) 724556

DL70 Application Brochure 3 (TAN and TBN) 724559DL70 Applikationsbroschüre 3 (TAN und TBN) 724558

DL70 Application Brochure 4 (Electroplating) 724561DL70 Applikationsbroschüre 4 (Galvanik) 724560

DL7x Application Brochure 5 (Determinations in Water) 51724634DL7x Applikationsbroschüre 5 (Bestimmungen in Wasser) 51724633

DL7x Application Brochure 6 (Direct Measurement with Ion Selective Electrodes) 51724646DL7x Applikationsbroschüre 6 (Direktmessung mit ionenselektiven Elektroden) 51724645

DL7x Application Brochure 7 (Incremental Techniques with Ion Selective Electrodes) 51724648DL7x Applikationsbroschüre 7 (Additionsverfahren mit ionenselektiven Elektroden) 51724647

DL7x Application Brochure 8 (Standardization of Titrants I) 51724650DL7x Applikationsbroschüre 8 (Titerbestimmungen I) 51724649

DL7x Application Brochure 9 (Standardization of Titrants II) 51724652DL7x Applikationsbroschüre 9 (Titerbestimmungen II) 51724651

DL7x Application Brochure 13 (Nitrogen Determination by Kjeldahl Digestion) 51724769DL7x Applikationsbroschüre 13 (Stickstoffbestimmung nach Kjeldahl Aufschluss) 51724768

DL7x Application Brochure 14 (Good Labatory Practice in the Titration Lab) 51724908DL7x Applikationsbroschüre 14 (Gute Laborpraxis im Titrationslabor) 51724907

DL7x Application Brochure 15 (Guidelines for Result Check, 51724910Method Validation and Instrument Certification)

DL7x Applikationsbroschüre 15 (Leitfaden zur Resultatkontrolle, 51724909Methodenvalidierung und Gerätezertifizierung)

DL7x Application Brochure 16 (Validation of Titration Methods) 51724912DL7x Applikationsbroschüre 16 (Validierung von Titrationsmethoden) 51724911


Technical Data

ContentsPage

12. Technical data ........................................................................................... 12-3

12.1 Measurement system ................................................................................ 12-3

12.2 Outputs ...................................................................................................... 12-4

12.3 Burette drive module ................................................................................ 12-5

12.4 Interchangeable burettes ......................................................................... 12-5

12.5 Propeller stirrer ......................................................................................... 12-5

12.6 Display ....................................................................................................... 12-5

12.7 Memories ................................................................................................... 12-5

12.8 Interface for memory card ........................................................................ 12-6

12.9 Attachment possibilities for peripheral units ......................................... 12-6

12.10 Sockets and connectors ........................................................................... 12-7

12.10.1 DIN socket ................................................................................................... 12-7

12.10.2 TTLIO socket ............................................................................................... 12-7

12.10.3 RS232C connector (Centronics option) ...................................................... 12-7

12.10.4 Centronics socket (Centronics option) ........................................................ 12-8

12.10.5 RS232C socket ........................................................................................... 12-9

12.11 Additional data .......................................................................................... 12-9


Technical Data

12. Technical data

12.1 Measurement system

End point indication• potentiometric• photometric• change of the refractive index and/or the turbidity• voltametric/amperometric• conductometric Third-party instrument with analog output

Temperature compensation Temperature input via keypad or automatical-for pH/pM/pX measurement ly with the aid of a temperature sensor

Sensor input: pH option(differential amplifier) Triaxial socket (LEMO)

• Input resistance >1012 Ω (protected up to 1000 V capacitatively)• Offset current <1 pA (20 °C)• Measurement range

- pH value ±27.6 pH- voltage ±2050.0 mV

• Resolution 0.1 mV, 0.002 pH (pM, pX)• Maximum permissible error 0.1%• Zero point drift <30 µV/ °C• Additional reference input Banana socket, diameter: 4 mm

Temperature sensor input 4-pin socket (LEMO)

• Measurement range -30 °C to 130 °C• Resolution 0.1 °C• Maximum permissible error 0.2 °C• Measurement principle 4-line measurement technique: Pt100 or

Pt1000• Zero point drift <0.01 °C/ °C

Technical Data


Sensor input: KF optionSensor input 2 Banana sockets, diameter: 4 mm

Voltage source• Range -1270 to +1270 mV• Resolution 10 mV in the range -1270 to +1270 mV

1 mV in the range -127 to +127 mV

• Measurement range -150 to +150 µA• Resolution 0.01µA (16-bit AD converter)• Maximum permissible error 0.1%

Current source• Range -127 to +127 µA• Resolution 1 µA in the range -127 to +127 µA

0.1 µA in the range -12.7 to +12.7 µA

• Measurement range -1500 to +1500 mV• Resolution 0.1mV (16-bit AD converter))• Maximum permissible error 0.1%

12.2 Outputs

Stirrer output 5-pin socket (mini DIN)

• Voltage range 0 – 18 V in no-load operation• Speed stabilized Typically: <5%

the output is protected electronically againstoverload, Imax: 300 mA

Analog output 2 banana sockets, diameter: 2 mm

• Gain 1• Offset: max. permissible error 35 mV• Range ±2000 mV• Range: max. permissible error 1%• Output resistance 220 Ω


Technical Data

12.3 Burette drive module

With direct current motorEquipment DL50/DL53: max. 1, DL55/DL58: max. 2Resolution 1/5000 of the burette volumeMaximum permissible error 0.3% relative to the respective burette volume

of 5, 10 and 20 mLFilling time 20 sDischarge time Minimum 20 s

12.4 Interchangeable burettes

Volume 1, 5, 10 and 20 mLMaterials which come into contact withthe titrant Fluoroplastic, borosilicate glass, ceramics

12.5 Propeller stirrer

Maximum speed 3800 rpmPower consumption Pmax.: 6 W

Ptypical: 1.2 W at 12 V

12.6 Display

LCD with graphics capability 6 lines, 39 characters per line240 x 64 pixels, backlighting through coldcathode fluorescent lamp

Languages English, German, French, Spanish and Italian

12.7 Memories

Database METTLER methods, standard methods

User data memory (EEPROM) User methods, resource and sample data, spacefor approx. 50 standard methods

Technical Data


12.8 Interface for memory card

Slot for 68-pin memory card of type 1Standards supported:

• PCMCIA, version 2.0• JEIDA, version 4.1

Memory cards which can be used:

1. Flash memory card series 2

Intel with the designation: • iMC002FLSA - 20 (2 MB storage capacity)

• iMC004FLSA - 20 (4 MB storage capacity)

Mitsubishi with the designation: • MF82M1-G7DAT 01 (2 MB storage capacity)• MF84M1-G7DAT 01 (4 MB storage capacity)

2. SRAM MelcardMitsubishi with the designation: • MF31M1-LCDAT 01 (1 MB storage capacity)

12.9 Attachment possibilities for peripheral units

Balance Attachment via RS232C interface of the Cen-tronics or an RS option at slot No. 4 for allMETTLER TOLEDO and SARTORIUS balances

Printer Attachment via Centronics interface of the Cen-tronics option or via RS232C interface of an RSoption at slot No. 4 for various commercialgraphics printers (on use of the RS option withXON/XOFF protocol)

Sample Changer Attachment via RS232C interface of the RSoption at slot No. 3 (available as an option)

Terminal or computer Attachment via RS232C interface of the RS(LIMS: in-house laboratory option at slot No. 3 (available as an option)information management system)

Auxiliary units (third-party units) Attachment via TTLIO socket of the RS optionat slot No. 3 (available as an option)

External keyboard (third-party unit, Attachment via the DIN socket, 5-pine.g. commercial PC keyboard)


Technical Data

12.10 Sockets and connectors

12.10.1 DIN socket

5-pin, DIN 180°, following DIN 41524

12.10.2 TTLIO socket

8-pin connector, series 712 waterproof (TTL: Transistor-Transistor-Logic)

The socket has 2 TTL inputs and 4 TTL outputs.

VCC: 5 V

Titrator

Titrator

8

7

12

3

4

56

Pin assignment

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

GND

In 1

In 2

Out 1

Out 2

Out 3

VCC

Out 4

+5 V

VCC: +5 V, max. 60 mA

In: TTL; short circuit proofPulse ≥150 ms (the input sig-nal must be at least 150 ms forthe titrator)

Out: Open collector• Vce max. = 24 V• Ic max. = 20 mA

12.10.3 RS232C connector (Centronics option)

9-pin, D-Sub

Data to titrator

Data from titrator

Handshake from titrator,fixed to operational readinessElectrically isolated signalground

CLOCK

DATA

–

GND

VCC

Pin assignment

1

2

4

5

3

5

2

4

1

+

Titrator

330 Ω+12 V

BRShielding

RxD (In)

TxD (Out)

DSR

RSGND

Pin assignment

1

2

3

4

5

1

2

9

3

4

5

8

7

6

Technical Data


/STROBE

D0

D1

D2

D3

D4

D5

D6

D7

/ACK

BUSY

PE

SLCT

/AUTO FDXT

/ERROR

/INIT

/SLCTIN

GND

GND

KI

L

AE

DC

B

F

G

H

S

N OP

R

M

TU

12.10.4 Centronics socket (Centronics option)

19-pin connector, series 723 waterproof

Signal ground

Pin assignment

A: Data ready

B:

C:

D:

E:F:

G:

H:

I:

K: Data adopted

L: Printer occupied

M: End of paper

N: Printer active

O: Automatic line feed

P: Printer error

R: Initializing printer

S: Printer selected

T:

U:

Titrator

Data


Technical Data

12.10.5 RS232C socket

8-pin connector DIN 45326, series 723 waterproof

Titrator

Data to titrator

Data from titrator

Electrically isolated signalgroundHandshake from titratorfixed to operational readi-ness

12.11 Additional data

Housing Polyester

Titration stand Polypropylene

Keypad Polyester, splashwater-proof

Dimensions Width: 260 mm, depth: 395 mm, height: 270 mm

Weight Approx. 8 kg with one burette drive

Power supply 100 – 240 VAC ±10% (automatic range adjustment)

Fuse 2 x T1,6L250V (not exchangeable)

Frequency 50/60 Hz

Maximum power consumption 400 mA

Ambient conditions • Ambient temperature: +5 °C to +40 °C• Maximum relative atmospheric humidity of 80% for

temperatures of up to 31 °C, decreasing linearly to50% relative atmospheric humidity at 40 °C.

• Use indoors• Height up to 2000 m• Overvoltage category II• Pollution degree 2

8

7

61

4

2

53 330 Ω

+12 V

BRShielding

TxD (Out)

RxD (In)

RSGND

DSR

Pin assignment

1

2

3

6

8


Index

Index

Numbers incorporating dashes refer to sections in the Reference Handbook (example: 3-38),Numbers without dashes refer to the Quick Guide (example: 9).

<F1>...<F5> 9, 10∆E

EP titration function 3-39EQP titration function 3-25EQP titration function (Ipol/Upol) 3-49measure function 3-17

∆E(set)EP titration function 3-39EQP titration function 3-22

∆tEP titration function 3-39EQP titration function 3-25EQP titration function (Ipol/Upol) 3-49measure function 3-17

Accessoriesoptional accessories 11-7standard equipment 11-4

Activatecontrol input 6-32control output 6-33

Adjust measuring inputs 6-28Amperometric indication

EP titration function (Ipol/Upol) 3-58EQP titration function (Ipol/Upol) 3-47

Analysisaborting (Reset) 5-12fading out 5-11is interrupted 5-11menu sequence 5-4"Run" menu 5-3start 5-4

Analysis sequences (examples)CaCl2 determination 5-7calibration of a pH electrode 27comparison: titration stand 1/ST20A 5-16determination of the HCl content 12pH-stating 5-10titer determination (NaOH) 32with the sample changer 5-17

Arrow keys 7Asterisk (*) 3-4, 3-11Asymmetric (evaluation procedure)

equivalence point recognition 3-28, 3-50evaluation parameter 3-34, 3-53explanation 8-16

Audio signal 6-28Auto stand

definition 2-17sample series 5-6, 5-15

Auxiliary functionsexplanation 9, 6-3keys 6-3overview 1-4, 1-5

Auxiliary value(s)entering 2-15entry through determination 2-15function 3-73memories 3-73resource 2-15storage procedure 2-16

Balance(s)configuration (METTLER TOLEDO) 2-22configuration (SARTORIUS) 2-22connection 10-10defining 2-21

Bar-code readerconnection 10-16defining 2-24

Bar-code string 6-43Baud rate

balances 2-22computer 2-23printer 2-20terminal 2-25

Bidirectional transmission mode 2-21, 4-12Buffer solutions

DIN/NIST buffer 3-70MERCK buffer 3-69METTLER TOLEDO buffer 3-69

Buretteair bubbles 10-8equipping 10-5filling 13inserting 10-6installing 10-4maintaining 10-4, 10-7order No. 11-4rinsing 6-11rinsing tip 6-12

Index


Burette driveinserting 10-3selecting 2-5

Burette volumeselecting 2-5smallest increment 3-24

Burette tip 6-12

C (constant) 3-66, 8-7c ( nominal concentration) 8-3c * t (actual concentration) 8-3Calculation(s)

formulas 8-17function 3-66indices 8-9performing (auxiliary function) 6-20

Calibrationfunction 3-69pH electrodes 27sensors 3-69temperature sensors 6-6

Calibration datameasuring inputs 6-29sensors 2-9, 2-10, 3-69temperature sensors 2-12

Centronics interfaceGA42 printer 2-18printer configuration 2-19

Centronics optionconnection possibilities 10-9installing 10-10

Changer 6-9Character set (computer) 2-24Clock (titrator) 6Code (sync function) 7-18Combined termination conditions 3-34, 3-53Command keys 9Communication protocol (computer) 2-24Computer

bar-code reader 2-24bar-code string 6-43configuration 2-23connection 10-10data transfer 6-40remote control 6-42

Concentration (titrant) 2-4, 8-3Conditioning 3-15Conductivity measurement 2-8Conductometer 2-8Constants

calculation function 3-66calculations (auxiliary function) 6-20examples 8-18

Continuous (titrant addition) 3-40, 3-60Control band

EP titration function 3-40EP titration function (Ipol/Upol) 3-60pH/mV-stat function 3-63

Control inputactivating (auxiliary function) 6-32function 7-15

Control inputsdefining 7-4resource 7-4

Control mode (activate control output)input controlled 6-33on/off 6-33sequential 6-34

Control mode (control output function)fixed time 7-16input controlled 7-16on/off 7-16sequential 7-17

Control outputactivating (auxiliary function) 6-33function 7-16

Control outputsdefining 7-5resource 7-5

Control rangeEP titration function 3-40EP titration function (Ipol/Upol) 3-60pH/mV-stat function 3-63

Correction factor f 4-6, 5-6Correlation coefficient 3-62, 3-65, 8-6CSTAT (correlation coefficient) 3-62, 8-6Current measurement (Ipol/Upol) 6-7Current sample (mask)

notes 5-6Cursor 10Cx (calculation constant) 8-7

Database 12-5Data bits

computer 2-24printer 2-20terminal 2-25

Data sheetKF option 10-12pH option 10-12

Data Transfer 6-36


Index

Dateentering 6-27selecting format 6-26

Date specificationauxiliary values 2-15methods 3-11sensors 2-9temperature sensors 2-11titrants 2-5

Defined are (mask)exclusion 6-30meaning 5-5

Delay 3-42, 3-61Directory (memory card) 6-37Dispense

auxiliary function (burette) 6-12auxiliary function (ST20A) 6-10continuously 6-13continuously (Ipol/Upol) 6-15function 3-19

DL58commands 7-3functions 7-3resources 7-3

DLWin software 4-13, 6-41Documentation

information 4Drift (potential measurement) 3-17Dynamic (titrant addition)

EP titration function 3-39EQP titration function 3-22

E (potential) 3-17, 8-7EHNV (half neutralization value) 3-20, 8-4Electrodes (METTLER TOLEDO) 2-7, 2-13End point

EP titration function 3-41EP titration function (Ipol/Upol) 3-60pH/mV-stat function 3-63range 3-40, 3-60titration 3-37, 3-56

Entry keys 10EP

absolute 3-41relative 3-41

EP titration (function) 3-37EP titration (Ipol/Upol) (function) 3-56EPOT 8-4EQP titration (function) 3-20EQP titration (Ipol/Upol) (function) 3-45Equilibrium controlled measured value acquisition

EP titration function 3-39

EQP titration function 3-25EQP titration function (Ipol/Upol) 3-49measure function 3-17

Equivalence point(s)explanation 3-20, 3-45, 8-14formulas for restriction 8-19maximum number/sample determination 8-20range 3-32, 3-51recognition 3-28, 3-50

Equivalence point titration 3-20, 3-45Equivalent number

calculation function 3-68entering 3-13

Error messages"EPROM test failed" 9-3learn titration 5-11"RAM test failed" 9-3referring to Section 9.1 9-3

Esc command (<F1>) 9ET1 3-22, 3-38, 8-4ET2 3-22, 3-38, 8-4Evaluation

EQP titration function 3-34EQP titration function (Ipol/Upol) 3-53pH/mV-stat function 3-65

Evaluation procedureEQP titration function 3-28, 3-34EQP titration function (Ipol/Upol) 3-50, 3-53explanation 8-14

Expert (user level) 6-31Expiry date (titrant) 2-5, 5-4External keyboard

connection 10-15defining 2-26key assignment 10-15

External stand 2-17Extinction 2-8

f (correction factor) 4-6, 8-3Fixed time (control output function ) 7-16Fixed volume

note 5-5selecting 3-12

Form feed (printer) 2-19Formula(s)

auxiliary value function 3-73calculation function 3-66calculations (auxiliary function) 6-20constants 8-18for restriction of the equivalence point 8-19results 8-17titer function 3-72

Frame lines (report) 2-19Function(s)

Index


adding 7-8deleting 7-8DL58 7-3explanation 20, 3-3maximum number 7-9modifying 3-10overview 24selecting 3-7

H (auxiliary value) 2-15, 8-3Half neutralization value 3-20

In 3.1/3.2 (TTL inputs) 6-32Incremental (titrant addition)

EQP titration function 3-24EQP (Ipol/Upol) titration function 3-48two-phase titration function 7-14

Indexing formscompilation 8-12examples 8-9, 8-10

IndicationEP titration function (Ipol/Upol) 3-57EQP titration function (Ipol/Upol) 3-46

Indices 8-9Inflection point 8-14Initial potential ET1 3-22Input controlled

activate control output (auxiliary function) 6-33control output function 7-16

Input signal (control input function) 7-15Installation and maintenance 10-3Instruction

control output function 7-17function 7-11

Interchangeable burette: see burette 10-4Interpolation (evaluation) 8-14Interval (conditioning) 3-15

Karl-Fischer titrationsaccessories 11-15

Keyboardexternal 2-26titrator 7

Key combinations 10KF option

inputs and outputs 10-10installing 10-11measuring inputs (calibration data) 6-29polarized sensors 2-13

LabX titration software 4-13, 6-41Language (changing) 11, 6-27Learn titration

function 3-43results 5-9

Lift position (sample changer) 6-9Line feed (printer) 2-19Lists (explanation) 8

M (molar mass) 3-68, 8-3m (sample size) 8-3Maintenance

burette 10-7titrator 10-3

Malfunctions 9-6Manual

temperature entry 3-13titration 6-14, 6-16

Masks (explanation) 8Max. time (control input function) 7-15Maximum (evaluation procedure)


Maximum time (EP titration function (Ipol/Upol))3-61

Maximum volumeEP titration function 3-42EP titration function (Ipol/Upol) 3-61EQP titration function 3-33EQP titration function (Ipol/Upol) 3-52pH/mV-stat function 3-64

Mean value xauxiliary value function 3-73calculation function 3-67titer function 3-72

Measure (function) 3-17Measure mode

EQP titration function 3-25EQP titration function (Ipol/Upol) 3-49two-phase titration function 7-14

Measured points for equivalence point recog-nition3-28, 3-44, 3-50

Measured valuesdisplaying 5-7, 6-21maximum number/titration function 8-20storage specification 3-64, 3-74, 8-20

Measuring inputsadjusting 6-28calibration data 6-29


Index

Memory carddirectory 6-37formatting 6-36, 6-40inserting 10-11interface 12-6types 12-6use 6-36

Memory copy(ies)copying on memory card 6-39loading to titrator 6-40transferring to computer 6-41

Menusexplanation 8keys 8overview 1-2, 1-3

Methodconcept 19deleting 3-5explanation 3-3generating 24modifying 3-7modifying (current sample series) 5-12modifying (ongoing method: DL55/DL58) 5-13on computer 4-5on memory card 4-5printing 3-4storage procedure 3-7

Methodsmenu 3-3printing 3-4selecting 3-4

Method IDdefining 3-11entering 4-4, 5-5explanation 3-4METTLER methods 3-6modifying 3-9standard methods 3-5

METTLER methods90001: performance 1490002: performance 27explanation 19modifying 25, 3-6printing 3-6

Minimum (evaluation procedure)equivalence point recognition 3-28, 3-50evaluation parameter 3-34, 3-53explanation 8-14

Misc. ... 6-26Mixing time (two-phase titration function ) 7-14Modify: command (<F4>) 10Molar mass M

calculation function 3-68entering 3-13

neq (number of equivalence points) 8-4

OK command (<F5>) 9On/Off

activate control output (auxiliary function) 6-33control output function 7-16

Operating concept 7Options 10-9Out 3.1...3.4 (TTL outputs) 6-33Output (reports) 3-74, 6-24

P1/P2 8-6Paper (printer)

fanfold 2-19format 2-19single sheet 2-19

Parameters (explanation) 20Parity

balances 2-22computer 2-23terminal 2-25printer 2-20 t

Peripherals (setup menu) 2-18pH electrode

calibrating 26slope 26zero point 26

pH measurement 35pH option

inputs and outputs 10-10installing 10-11measuring inputs (calibration data) 6-29sensors 2-7

pH/mV-stat (function) 3-62pH-stating (example) 3-65Piston

assembling 10-4inserting 10-4

Polarized sensorsadding 2-14KF option 2-13modifying 2-13resource 2-13storage procedure 2-13

Potential 1/2 (evaluation parameters) 3-35, 3-54Potential measurement 6-4, 6-7Predispensing

EP titration function 3-38EP titration function (Ipol/Upol) 3-59EQP titration function 3-21EQP titration function (Ipol/Upol) 3-48two-phase titration function 7-13

Index


Pretitration (pH/mV-stat function) 3-63Primary standard 30, 31Printer

ASCII 2-18configuration 2-19, 2-20connection 10-10defining 2-18

Pt100/Pt1000 sensor 2-11Pump

function 7-11titration stand parameters 3-13rate (solvents) 2-27

Q 8-4QDISP 3-19, 8-7QEND 8-4QEX 8-4QP1/QP2 8-4QSTAT 8-6QT1/QT2 8-6QTOT 8-6

R (result) 3-66, 8-7Range (equivalence point) 3-32, 3-51Raw results

compilation 8-8explanation 3-18recording 3-75, 6-24storage specification 8-20

Rear view of titrator 10-10Recalculations 6-20Recognition (equivalence point) 3-28, 3-50Reevaluation

condition met 5-11defining condition 3-35, 3-36, 3-55performing 6-18

Reference electrode 2-7Relative standard deviation srel 3-67Remote control 6-42Report

auxiliary function 6-24function 3-74header 6-27

Reset key 7, 5-12

Resourceschanging 5-8copying on memory card 6-39copying to titrator 6-39deleting 2-3DL58 7-3explanation 2-3list 2-3modifying 2-3printing 2-3transferring to computer 6-41

Result(s)auxiliary function 6-18deleting 6-22examples 3-67, 8-17learn titration 5-9maximum number/sample series 8-20R 3-66, 3-71recording 3-75, 6-24Rx 6-20storage specification 8-20units 3-67, 8-17

Result listdisplaying 6-18exclusion 6-30notes 5-9

Rinseauxiliary function (ST20A) 6-10tip (burette) 6-12titration stand parameters 3-14

Routine (user level) 6-31RS option

connection possibilities 10-11installing 10-11

RS232 interfaceGA42 printer 2-20printer configuration 2-20

Runanalysis menu 5-3key function 5-3

s (standard deviation) 8-7Safety measures

for operational safety 5for your protection 5, 10-3

Safety notes 1-1Sample

function 3-12ID (identification) 4-5, 5-6


Index

Samplesmaximum number 8-20status 4-7

Sample changerauxiliary function 6-9connection 10-10defining 2-25sample series 5-6, 5-15titration stand 2-17titration stand parameters 3-13

Sample dataadding 4-8deleting 4-6entering 4-4, 5-5, 5-10list 4-4, 4-6memory (sample menu) 4-3modifying 4-7on computer 4-13printing 4-7recording 3-75, 6-24storage specification 36, 4-3

Sample data maskanalysys menu 5-5sample menu 4-5

Sample seriesdeleting 4-6entering 4-4with auto stand 5-6, 5-15with ST20A 5-6, 5-15

Sample series (DL55/DL58)entering 4-9executing 5-15

Sample size 3-21, 3-38, 3-48, 3-59, 8-3Save (storage procedure)

auxiliary values 2-16devices for control intput 7-5devices for control output 7-6methods 3-7polarized sensors 2-13sensors 2-10solvents 2-28temperature sensors 2-12titrants 2-6

Segmented (evaluation procedure)equivalence point recognition 3-28, 3-50evaluation parameter 3-34, 3-53explanation 8-15

Send mode (computer) 2-24

Sensor(s)adding 2-10auxiliary function 6-4deleting 2-7modifying 2-7order No. 11-10pH option 2-7resource 2-7storage procedure 2-10

Sensor inputspolarized sensors 2-13sensors 2-8temperature sensors 2-11

Separation time (two-phase titration function) 7-14Sequential

activating control output (auxiliary function) 6-34control output function 7-17

Setup (menu) 2-3Shorten analysis sequence 6-30SLOPE 8-3Slope

calculation 3-69entry through determination 2-9explanation 2-9minimum/maximum value 3-71pH electrode 26theoretical value 2-9

Slots 10-10Software LabX 4-13, 6-41Software version 1-1Solvents

adding 2-28deleting 2-27modifying 2-27storage procedure 2-28

Special methodsDL58 7-7explanation 7-3

Speeddefining 3-16modifying 5-8, 6-8

srel (relative standard deviation) 8-7ST20A

connection 10-10outputs 2-28

Stand 1/2 (titration stands) 2-17Standard (evaluation procedure)


Standard deviation s 3-67

Index


Standard method(s)application examples 22explanation 19, 3-5functions 20modifying 25, 30number 20printing 3-5

Start/end character (computer) 2-24Statistics

modifying 6-22selecting for calculations 3-67

Statusremote control 6-42peripherals 2-18samples 4-7

Steepest jump only 3-31Stir (function) 3-16Stirrer

auxiliary function (stirrer) 6-8output 2-17speed 5-8, 6-8

Stirring time 3-16Stop bits

computer 2-24printer 2-20terminal 2-25

Stop for reevaluation 3-35, 3-55, 5-11Storage interval (pH/mV-stat function) 3-64Storage procedure

measured values 3-64, 3-74, 8-20raw results 8-20results 8-20sample data 4-3

Symbolsexplanation 8-3list 8-3

Sync (function) 7-18Synchronization mode (Sync function) 7-18System

computer/terminal 2-23titrator (information) 9-3, 9-6

T (temperature) 7-10t (titer) 3-72, 8-3t(max)

EP titration function 3-39EQP titration function 3-25EQP titration function (Ipol/Upol) 3-49measure function 3-18temperature function 7-10

t(min)EP titration function 3-39EQP titration function 3-25EQP titration function (Ipol/Upol) 3-49measure function 3-17temperature function 7-10

Table of measured valuesdisplaying 5-7, 6-21recording 3-75, 6-24

Technical databurette 12-5burette drive 12-5Centronics socket 12-8DIN socket 12-7display 12-5measurement system 12-3memories 12-5outputs 12-4peripherals 12-6RS232C connector (Centronics option) 12-7RS232C socket (RS option) 12-9stirrer 12-5TTLIO sockets 12-7

Temperaturecorrection 3-13, 3-69entering 2-9, 4-6, 5-6function 7-10measurement 2-9, 3-13, 3-18, 3-20, 3-37,

3-62, 3-69, 7-10measuring (auxiliary function) 6-5

Temperature sensor(s)calibrating 6-6Lemo cable plug 10-10Pt100/Pt1000 2-11resource 2-11selecting 3-13storage procedure 2-12

TendencyEP titration function 3-42EP titration function (Ipol/Upol) 3-61EQP titration function 3-32EQP titration function (Ipol/Upol) 3-51pH/mV-stat function 3-64


Index

Terminalconfiguration (keyboard) 10-16configuration (titrator) 2-25connection 10-11key assignment 10-17

Termination (parameters)EP titration function 3-42EP titration function (Ipol/Upol) 3-61EQP titration function 3-33EQP titration function (Ipol/Upol) 3-52pH/mV-stat function 3-64

Threshold 3-29, 3-51Threshold value

evaluation procedure "Asymmetric" 3-30evaluation procedure "Minimum/Maximum" 3-30evaluation procedure "Segmented" 3-31evaluation procedure "Standard" 3-30

TIME 5-4, 8-3Time

entering 6-27sample function (conditioning) 3-15selecting format 6-26stir function 3-16, 5-7

Time specificationauxiliary values 2-15methods 3-11sensors 2-9temperature sensors 2-11titrants 2-5

Timed increment measured value acquisitionEP titration function 3-41EP titration function (Ipol/Upol) 3-60EQP titration function 3-27EQP titration function (Ipol/Upol) 3-49

Titerchecking 2-5determination (NaOH solution) 32entering 2-4entry through determination 2-4explanation 30function 3-72

Titlefunction 3-11METTLER methods 19standard methods 19

Titrantadding 2-6concentration 2-4, 8-3deleting 2-4modifying 2-4storage procedure 2-6

Titrant additionEP titration function 3-39EP titration function (Ipol/Upol) 3-60EQP titration function 3-22EQP titration function (Ipol/Upol) 3-48pH/mV-stat function 3-63two-phase titration function 7-14

Titratemanually 6-14manually (Ipol/Upol) 6-16

Titration curves1st derivative 3-30, 3-31, 3-54, 8-152nd derivative 3-31, 3-54, 8-15displaying 5-8, 5-8, 6-21recording 3-75, 6-24

Titration standequipping 10-9meaning 7-8order No. 11-7resource 2-17selecting 3-13

Titratorbattery 6cleaning housing 10-3connections 6, 10-10documentation 4front view 6ID (identification) 6-27internal clock 6keypad 7opening housing 10-3rear view 6, 10-10remote control 6-42self test 7settings 6-26

Transmission mode (balance)bidirectional 2-21unidirectional 2-21

TTL inputsactivating 6-32wiring electronically 10-14wiring mechanically 10-13

TTL outputsactivating 6-33wiring electronically 10-14

TTLIO socket(s)inputs and outputs 10-13technical data 12-7used by titrator 10-13

Turntable (sample changer) 6-10Two-phase titration

function 7-12special method 7-12

Index


Unidirectional transmission mode 2-21Units 3-67, 8-17, 8-18Units of measurement (sensors) 2-8Urgent sample (DL55/DL58) 4-10User data memory 12-5User level 6-31User method(s)

copying on memory card 6-38copying to titrator 6-39deleting 3-6explanation 19, 3-6printing 3-6"titer by EQP titration" 34transferring to computer 6-41

VDISP 3-19, 8-7VEND 8-4VEQ 8-4VEX 8-4Voltage measurement (Ipol/Upol) 6-7Voltametric indication

EP titration function (Ipol/Upol) 3-57EQP titration function (Ipol/Upol) 3-46

Volumeentering 4-5, 5-6selecting 3-12

Volume limitsat volume entry 4-5, 5-6entering 3-12

VP1/VP2 8-4VSTAT 8-6VT 3-65, 8-6VT1/VT2 8-6VTOT 8-6

Wait timepredispensing 3-21, 3-38, 3-48, 3-59, 7-13stir function 3-16, 5-7

Weightentering 4-5, 5-6selecting 3-12transferred by balance 4-12

Weight limitsat weight entry 4-5, 5-6entering 3-12

x (mean value) 8-7

z (equivalent number) 3-13, 3-68, 8-3ZERO 8-3Zero point (sensor)

calculation 3-69entry through determination 2-9explanation 2-9pH electrode 26theoretical value 2-9

Zero point (temperature sensor)entry through determination 2-12explanation 2-11theoretical value 2-12


Indice

Asimétrica (procedimiento de evaluación)explicación 8-16parámetro de evaluación, 3-34, 3-53reconocimiento punto de equivalencia 3-28,

3-50Asterisco (*) 3-4, 3-11Avance

de línea (impresora) 2-19de página (impresora) 2-19

Aviso de errorescon indicaciones en cáp. 9.1 9-3"EPROM test failed" 9-3"RAM test failed" 9-3valoración de aprendizaje 5-1

Avisos de seguridad 1-1

Balanza (s)conectar 10-10configuración (METTLER TOLEDO) 2-22configuración (SARTORIUS) 2-22definir 2-21

Banda de controlfunc. pH/mV-Stato 3-63func. valoración EP 3-40func. valoración EP (Ipol/Upol) 3-60

Base de datos 12-5Baudios

balanza 2-22impresora 2-20ordenador 2-23terminal 2-25

Bits de datosimpresora 2-20ordenador 2-24terminal 2-25

Bits de paradaimpresora 2-20ordenador 2-24terminal 2-25

Bombafunción 7-11parámetros cabeza de valoración 3-13

Indice

Los números separados por un guión (ejemplo 3-38) se refieren al capítulo correspondienteen el Manual de Instrucciones, las cifras aisladas a la Guía de Manejo (ejemplo 9).

<F1>...<F5> 9, 10∆E

func. medir 3-17func. valoración EP 3-39func. valoración EQP 3-25func. valoración EQP (Ipol/Upol) 3-49

∆E (nom.)func. valoración EP 3-39func. valoración EQP 3-22

∆tfunc. medir 3-17func. valoración EP 3-39func. valoración EQP 3-25func. valoración EQP (Ipol/Upol) 3-49

Accesoriosaccesorios facultativos 11-7equipo básico 11-4

Acondicionamiento (ST20A) 3-15Activar

entrada mando a distancia 6-32salida mando a distancia 6-33

Acumulador 6Adición de reactivo

func. pH/mV-Stato 3-63func. valoración EP 3-39func. valoración EP (Ipol/Upol) 3-60func. valoración EQP 3-22func. valoración EQP (Ipol/Upol) 3-48func. valoración en dos fases 7-14

Adquisición datos medidos: incremental tiempofunc. valoración EP 3-41func. valoración EP (Ipol/Upol) 3-60func. valoración EQP 3-27func. valoración EQP (Ipol/Upol) 3-49

Agitadorfunción auxiliar (Stirrer) 6-8seleccionar salida 2-17

Agitar (función) 3-16Ajustar entradas de medida 6-28Análisis

empezar 5-4menú "Run" 5-3se interrumpe 5-11secuencia menú 5-4terminar (Reset) 5-12visualizar 5-11

Indice


Buretaburbujas de aire 10-8función auxiliar 6-11insertar 10-6instalar 10-4llenar 13llenar (lavar) 6-11mantenimiento 10-4, 10-7montaje 10-5

C (constante) 3-66, 8-7c (concentración nominal) 8-3c * t (concentración real) 8-3Cabeza de val. auto

definición 2-17serie(s) de muestras 5-6, 5-15

Cabeza de val. externa 2-17Cabeza de valoración

medios auxiliares 2-17montaje 10-8número de pedido 11-7seleccionar 3-13significado 7-8

Cálculo posterior 6-20Cálculo(s)

fórmulas 8-17función 3-66indicativos 8-9realización (función auxiliar) 6-20

Calibraciónelectrodo de pH 27función 3-69sensores 3-69sondas de temperatura 6-6

Cambiador de muestrascabeza de valoración 2-17conectar 10-10definir 2-25función auxiliar (Changer) 6-9parámetros cabeza de valoración 3-14serie de muestras(s) 5-6, 5-15

Cambiar: mando (<F4>) 10Cambio de buretas: ver buretasCambio de lengua 11, 6-27Centronics: ver interface/tarjetaCódigo (func. sincronización) 7-18Código de barras 6-43Coeficiente de correlación 3-62, 3-65, 8-6Combinación de teclas 10Concentración (reactivo) 2-4, 8-3Concepto

de manejo 7de métodos 19

Conductímetro 2-8

Constantesejemplo 8-18función auxiliar cálculo 6-20función cálculo 3-66

Continua (adición de reactivo) 3-40, 3-60Control de entrada

activar salida mando a distancia (función auxi-liar) 6-33

func. salida mando a distancia 7-16Control de equilibrio (adquisición de los valores

medidos)func. medir 3-17func. valoración EP 3-39func. valoración EQP 3-25func. valoración EQP (Ipol/Upol) 3-49

Copia de la memoriacarga al titulador 6-39copia a la tarjeta memoria 6-39transferir al ordenador 6-41

Criterios de terminación combinados 3-34, 3-53CSTAT (coeficiente de correlación) 3-62, 8-6Curso del análisis (ejemplo )

calibración electrodos de pH 27comparación: Cabeza de valoración 1/ST20A

5-16con cambiador de muestras 5-17determinación CaCl2 5-7determinación del contenido HCl 12determinación del título (NaOH) 32regulación del pH 5-10

Cursor 10Curvas de valoración

1ª derivada 3-30, 3-31, 3-54, 8-152ª derivada 3-31, 3-54, 8-15impresión 3-75, 6-24visualización 5-7, 5-8, 6-21

Cx (constantes de cálculo) 8-7

Data Transfer (transmisión de datos) 6-36Datos de calibración

entradas de medida 6-29sensores 2-9, 2-10, 3-69sondas de temperatura 2-12

Datos de muestraañadir 4-8borrar 4-6cambiar 4-7condiciones de memorización 36, 4-3desde ordenador 4-13entrar 4-4, 5-5, 5-10imprimir 4-7informe 3-75, 6-24lista 4-4, 4-6memoria (menú Sample) 4-4, 5-5, 5-10


Indice

Datos técnicosagitador 12-5buretas 12-5conector Centronics 12-8conector DIN 12-7conector RS232C (tarjeta RS) 12-9conector TTLIO 12-7enchufe RS232C (tarjeta Centronics) 12-7memorias 12-5motor de bureta 12-5pantalla 12-5periféricos 12-6salidas 12-4sistema de medida 12-3

Deriva (medida del potencial) 3-17Desviación estándar relativa (srel) 3-67Desviación estándar (s) 3-67Dinámica (adición de reactivo)

func. valoración EP 3-39func. valoración EQP 3-22

Directorio (tarjeta memoria) 6-37Diversos (Misc. ...) 6-26DLWin Software 4-13, 6-41DL58

funciones 7-3mandos 7-3medios auxiliares 7-3

Documentacióninformación 4

Dosificacióncontinua 6-13continua (Ipol/Upol) 6-15

Dosificación previafunc. valoración en dos fases 7-13func. valoración EP 3-38func. valoración EP (Ipol/Upol) 3-59func. valoración EQP 3-21func. valoración EQP (Ipol/Upol) 3-48

Dosificarfunción 3-19función auxiliar (buretas) 6-12función auxiliar (ST20A) 6-10

E (potencial) 3-17, 8-7EHNV (valor de semineutralización) 3-20, 8-4Electrodo de referencia 2-7Electrodos (METTLER TOLEDO) 2-7, 2-13Electrodos de pH

calibrar 26pendiente 26punto cero 26

Electrodos polarizadosalmacenar 2-13añadir 2-14cambiar 2-13tarjeta KF 2-13medios auxiliares 2-13

Embolocolocación 10-4montaje 10-4

Encabezamiento de informe 6-27Entrada mando a distancia

activar (función auxiliar) 6-32función 7-15

Entradas de sensoresfunc. salida mando a distancia 7-17sensores 2-8sensores polarizados 2-13

Entradas mando a distanciadefinir 7-4medios auxiliares 7-4

Entrar tiempométodos 3-11reactivo 2-5sensor de temperatura 2-11sensores 2-9valores auxiliares 2-15

EPabsoluto 3-41relativo 3-41

EPOT 8-4Esc (salir) mando (<F1>) 9Estadísticas

cambiar 6-22incluir en el cálculo 3-67

Estadomando a distancia 6-42muestras 4-7periféricos 2-18

Están definidos (máscara)bloquear 6-30significado 5-5

Estándar (procedimiento de evaluación)explicación 8-14parámetro de evaluación 3-34, 3-53reconocimiento punto de equivalencia 3-28,

3-50ET1 3-22, 3-38, 8-4ET2 3-22, 3-38, 8-4Evaluación

func. pH/mV-Stato 3-65func. valoración EQP 3-34func. valoración EQP (Ipol/Upol) 3-53

Indice


Evaluación posteriorcondición satisfecha 5-11definir una condición 3-35, 3-36, 3-55ejecución 6-18

Experto (nivel de usuario) 6-31Extinción 2-8

f (factor de corrección) 4-6, 5-6, 8-3Fallos 9-6Fecha

entrar 6-27seleccionar formato 6-26

Fecha caducidad (reactivo) 5-4Forma de control (activar salida mando a distan-

cia)control por entrada 6-33marcha/parada 6-33secuencial 6-34

Forma de control (func. salida mando a distancia)control por entrada 7-16marcha/parada 7-16secuencial 7-17tiempo fijo 7-16

Fórmula(s)constantes 8-18función auxiliar cálculos 6-20función cálculo 3-66función título 3-72función valores auxiliares 3-73para limitar los puntos de equivalencia 8-19resultados 8-17

Función(es)añadir 7-8borrar 7-8cambiar 3-10DL58 7-3explicación 20, 3-3número máximo 7-9seleccionar 3-7visión de conjunto 24

Funciones auxiliaresexplicación 9, 6-3teclas 6-3visión de conjunto 1-4, 1-5

Funciones de cálculo 3-66

H (valor auxiliar) 2-15, 8-3Hoja de datos

tarjeta KF 10-12tarjeta pH 10-12

ID métodoscambiar 3-9definir 3-11entrar 4-4, 5-5explicación 3-4métodos estándar 3-5métodos METTLER 3-6

ID muestras 4-5, 5-6Impresora

ASCII 2-18conectar 10-10configuración 2-19, 2-20definir 2-18

In 3.1/3.2 (entradas TTL) 6-32Incremental (adición de reactivo) 3-24, 3-48, 7-14Indicación

func. valoración EP (Ipol/Upol) 3-57func. valoración EQP (Ipol/Upol) 3-46

Indicación amperométricafunc. valoración EP (Ipol/Upol) 3-58func. valoración EQP (Ipol/Upol) 3-47

Indicación de fechamétodos 3-11reactivo 2-5sensores 2-9sondas de temperatura 2-11valores auxiliares 2-15

Indicación voltamétricafunc. valoración EP (Ipol/Upol) 3-57func. valoración EQP (Ipol/Upol) 3-46

Indicativos (forma)ejemplos 8-9, 8-10resumen 8-12

Informefunción 3-74función auxiliar (Report) 6-24

Informe de comunicación (ordenador) 2-24Instalación (menú Setup) 2-3Instalación y mantenimiento 10-3Instrucción

función 7-11función salida mando a distancia 7-17

Interface Centronicsconfiguración impresora 2-19impresora GA42 2-18

Interface RS232configuración impresora 2-20impresora GA42 2-20

Interpolación (evaluación) 8-14Intervalo (acondicionamiento) 3-15Intervalo de memorización (func. pH/mV-Stato)

3-64


Indice

Juego de caracteres (ordenador) 2-24

LabX Software 4-13, 6-41Lector de código de barras

conectar 10-16definir 2-24

Lengua (cambiar) 11, 6-27Límites de peso

entrar 3-12en entrada de muestra 4-5, 5-6

Límites volumenen entrada de muestras 4-5, 5-6entrar 3-12

Lista (aclaración) 8Lista datos de muestras 4-4, 4-6Lista de resultado

avisos 5-9bloquear 6-30visualizar 6-18

Llenar (lavar)función auxiliar (ST20A) 6-10parámetros cabeza de valoración 3-14

Llenar punta (bureta) 6-12

M (masa molar) 3-68, 8-3m (tamaño muestra) 8-3Mando a distancia 6-42Mantenimiento

bureta 10-7titulador 10-3

Manual (entrada de temperatura) 3-13Marcha/Parada

activar salida mando a distancia (función auxi-liar) 6-33

func. salida mando a distancia 7-16Márgenes (informe) 2-19Masa molar M

entrar 3-13func. cálculo 3-68

Máscara (aclaración) 8Máscara datos de muestras

menú análisis 5-5menú muestras 4-5

Máximo (procedimiento de evaluación)explicación 8-14parámetro evaluación 3-34, 3-53reconocimiento punto de equivalencia 3-28,

3-50

Medición del voltaje (Ipol/Upol) 6-7Medida

de la conductividad 2-8de la corriente (Ipol/Upol) 6-7del pH 35del potencial 6-4, 6-7

Medidas de seguridaden el puesto de trabajo 5para su protección 5, 10-3

Medios auxiliaresborrar 2-3cambiar 2-3, 5-8copiar en titulador 6-39DL58 7-3explicación 2-3imprimir 2-3lista 2-3transferir a ordenador 6-41

Medir (función) 3-17Memoria de datos

de muestras (menú Sample) 4-3de usuario 12-5

Memorizacióndatos de muestras 4-3electrodos polarizados 2-13instrumento para entrada mando a distancia 7-5instrumento para salida mando a distancia 7-6métodos 3-7reactivos 2-6resultados 8-20resultados sin elaborar 8-20sensores 2-10solventes 2-28sondas de temperatura 2-12valores auxiliares 2-16valores medidos 3-64, 3-74, 8-20

Memorizar valor auxiliar 3-73Menús

explicación 8teclas 8visión de conjunto 1-2, 1-3

Indice


Métodoalmacenar 3-7borrar 3-5cambiar 3-7cambiar ( método en curso: DL55/DL58) 5-13cambiar (actual serie de muestras) 5-12desde ordenador 4-5desde tarjeta memoria 4-5elaboración 24explicación 3-3imprimir 3-4

Métodosimprimir lista 3-4menú 3-3seleccionar 3-4

Método(s) del usuarioborrar 3-6copiar en la tarjeta memoria 6-38copiar en titulador 6-39explicación 19, 3-6imprimir 3-6título con valoración EQP 34transferir a ordenador 6-41

Método(s) estándarcambiar 25, 30ejemplo de uso 22explicación 19, 3-5funciones 20imprimir 3-5número 20

Métodos especialesDL58 7-7explicación 7-3

Métodos METTLER90001: Ejecución 1490002: Ejecución 27cambiar 25, 3-6explicación 19imprimir 3-6

Mínimo (procedimiento de evaluación)explicación 8-14parámetro de evaluación 3-34, 3-53reconocimiento punto de equivalencia 3-28,

3-50Misc. ... (Diversos) 6-26Motor de bureta

instalar 10-3seleccionar 2-5

Muestrafunción 3-12menú memoria de datos de muestras 4-3en curso (máscara): aviso 5-6urgente (DL55) 4-10

Muestrasestado 4-7número máximo 8-20

neq (número punto(s) de equivalencia) 8-4Nivel de usuario 6-31Nombre

función 3-11métodos estándar 19métodos METTLER- 19

Número de equivalenciaentrada 3-13func. cálculo 3-68

OK mando (<F5>) 9Ordenador

código de barras (string) 6-43conectar 10-10configuración 2-23lector de código de barras 2-24mando a distancia 6-42transmisión de datos 6-40

Out 3.1...3.4 (salidas TTL) 6-33

P1/P2 8-6Papel (impresora)

formato 2-19hojas únicas 2-19papel sin fin 2-19

Parada para evaluación posterior 3-35, 3-55, 5-11Parada pospuesta 3-42, 3-61Parámetros (aclaración) 20Paridad

balanza 2-22impresora 2-20ordenador 2-23terminal 2-25

Parte trasera del titulador 10-9Pendiente

cálculo 3-69electrodo de pH 26explicación 2-9registrar 2-9valor máximo/mínimo 3-71valor teórico 2-9


Indice

Periféricos (menú Setup) 2-18Peso

entrar 4-5, 5-6seleccionar 3-12transmisión desde balanza 4-12

pH-stato (ejemplo) 3-65pH/mV-Stato (función) 3-62Plato giratorio (cambiador de muestras) 6-10Posición elevador (cambiador de muestras) 6-9Potencial

1/2 (parámetros de evaluación) 3-35, 3-54inicial ET1 3-22

Proceso de evaluaciónexplicación 8-14func. valoración EQP 3-28, 3-34func. valoración EQP (Ipol/Upol) 3-50, 3-53

Punto cero (sensor)cálculo 3-69electrodo de pH 26explicación 2-9registrar 2-9valor teórico 2-9

Punto cero (sensor de temperatura)explicación 2-11registrar 2-12valor teórico 2-12

Punto de equivalenciaexplicación 3-20, 3-45, 8-14fórmulas para restricción 8-19número máx./determinación muestras 8-20rango 3-32, 3-51reconocimiento 3-28, 3-50

Punto de inflexión 8-14Punto final

func. pH/mV-Stato 3-63func. valoración EP 3-41func. valoración EP (Ipol/Upol) 3-60

Puntos de medida para reconocimiento del puntode equivalencia 3-28, 3-44, 3-50

Q 8-4QDISP 3-19, 8-7QEND 8-4QEX 8-4QP1/QP2 8-4QSTAT 8-6QT1/QT2 8-6QTOT 8-6

R (Resultado) 3-66, 8-7Rango

punto de equivalencia 3-32, 3-51punto final 3-40, 3-60

Rango de regulaciónfunc. pH/mV-Stato 3-63func. valoración EP 3-40func. valoración EP (Ipol/Upol) 3-60

Ranuras 10-9Reactivo

almacenar 2-6añadir 2-6borrar 2-4cambiar 2-4concentración 2-4, 8-3

Reconocimiento (punto de equivalencia) 3-28,3-50

Reducción curso del análisis 6-30Registro (tarjeta memoria) 6-37Reloj (titulador) 6Report (informe) 6-24Reset (tecla) 7, 5-12Resultado(s)

borrar 6-22condiciones de memorización 8-20ejemplos 3-67, 8-17función auxiliar (Results) 6-18hacer un informe 3-75, 6-24número máximol/serie de muestras 8-20R 3-66, 3-71Rx 6-20unidades 3-67, 8-17valoración de aprendizaje 5-9

Resultados sin elaborarcondiciones de memorización 8-20explicación 3-18hacer un informe 3-75, 6-24resumen 8-8

Results (Resultados) 6-18Run

menú análisis 5-3teclas función 5-3

Rutina (nivel de usuario) 6-31

Indice


s (desviación estándar) 8-7Salida mando a distancia

activar (función auxiliar) 6-33función 7-16

Salidas mando a distanciadefinir 7-5medios auxiliares 7-5

Secuencialactivar salida mando a distancia (función auxi-

liar) 6-34función salida mando a distancia 7-16

Segmentada (procedimiento de evaluación)explicación 8-15parámetro de evaluación 3-34, 3-53reconocimiento punto de equivalencia 3-28,

3-50Señal

acústica 6-28de entrada (func. entrada mando a distancia)

7-15Sensor(es)

almacenar 2-10añadir 2-10borrar 2-7cambiar 2-7función auxiliar 6-4medios auxiliares 2-7pH tarjeta 2-7

Serie de muestrasborrar 4-6con cabeza val. auto 5-6, 5-15con ST20A 5-6, 5-15entrar 4-4

Serie de muestras (DL55/DL58)ejecución 5-15entrar 4-9

Setup (menú instalación) 2-3Símbolo inicial/final (ordenador) 2-24Símbolos

explicación 8-3lista 8-3

Sincronización (función) 7-18Sistema

información 9-3, 9-6ordenador/terminal 2-23

SLOPE (pendiente de electrodos) 8-3Software LabX 4-13, 6-41Sólo salto más abrupto 3-31

Soluciones tampóntampones DIN/NIST 3-70tampones MERCK 3-69tampones METTLER TOLEDO 3-69

Solventesalmacenar 2-28añadir 2-28borrar 2-27cambiar 2-27

Sonda de temperaturaalmacenar 2-12calibrar 6-6enchufe Lemo 10-10medios auxiliares 2-11Pt100/Pt1000 2-11seleccionar 3-13

srel (desviación estándar relativa) 8-7ST20A

conectar 10-10salidas 2-28

Stand 1/2 (cabezas de valoración) 2-17Stirrer (agitador) 6-8Sustancia patrón 30, 31

T (temperatura) 7-10t (título) 3-72, 8-3t(máx)

func. medir 3-18func. temperatura 7-10func. valoración EP 3-39func. valoración EQP 3-25func. valoración EQP (Ipol/Upol) 3-49

t(mín)func. medir 3-17func. temperatura 7-10func. valoración EP 3-39func. valoración EQP 3-25func. valoración EQP (Ipol/Upol) 3-49

Tabla de valores medidoshacer un informe 3-75, 6-24visualizar 5-7, 6-21

Tamaño de muestras 3-21, 3-38, 3-48, 3-59, 8-3Tarjeta Centronics

installación 10-10posibilidades de conexión 10-9


Indice

Tarjeta KFelectrodos polarizados 2-13entradas de medida: datos de calibración 6-29entradas y salidas 10-10instalar 10-11

Tarjeta memoriadirectorio 6-37formatización 6-36, 6-40inserción 10-11interface 12-6tipos 12-6uso 6-36

Tarjeta pHentradas de medida: datos de calibración 6-29entradas y salidas 10-10instalar 10-11sensores 2-7

Tarjeta RSinstalación 10-11posibilidades de conexión 10-11

Tecla(s)de entrada 10flecha 7Reset 7, 5-12de mandos 9

Teclado (titulador) 7Teclado externo

asignación de las teclas 10-15conectar 10-15definir 2-26

Temperaturacorrección 3-13, 3-69entrar 2-9, 4-6, 5-6función 7-10medir 2-9, 3-13, 3-18, 3-20, 3-37, 3-62, 3-69,

7-10medir (función auxiliar) 6-5

Tendenciafunc. pH/mV-Stato 3-64func. valoración EP 3-42func. valoración EP (Ipol/Upol) 3-61func. valoración EQP 3-32func. valoración EQP (Ipol/Upol) 3-51

Terminación (parámetros)func. pH/mV-Stato 3-64func. valoración EP 3-42func. valoración EP (Ipol/Upol) 3-61func. valoración EQP 3-33func. valoración EQP (Ipol/Upol) 3-52

Terminalasignación de teclas 10-17conectar 10-11configuración 10-16sincronización 2-25

Tiempoentrar 6-27func. agitar 3-16, 5-7func. muestra (acondicionar) 3-15seleccionar formato 6-26

Tiempode agitación 3-16de espera 3-16de mezcla (func. valoración en dos fases) 7-14de separación (func. valoración en dos fases)

7-14fijo (func. salida mando a distancia) 7-16máx. (func. entrada mando a distancia) 7-15máximo (func. valoración EP (Ipol/Upol)) 3-61

TIME 5-4, 8-3Tipo de medición

func. valoración en dos fases 7-14func. valoración EQP 3-25func. valoración EQP (Ipol/Upol) 3-49

Tipo de sincronización (func. sincronización) 7-18Tipo de transmisión (balanza)

bidireccional 2-21unidireccional 2-21

Tipo de transmisión (ordenador) 2-24Titulador

acumulador 6apertura de la carcasa 10-3autotest 7conexiones 6, 10-10configuración 6-26documentación 4ID (identificación ) 6-27limpieza de la carcasa 10-3mando a distancia 6-42reloj interno 6teclado 7vista frontal 6vista trasera 6, 10-10

Títulocontrolar 2-5determinación (disolución NaOH) 32entrar 2-4explicación 30función 3-72registrar 2-4

Transmisión de datos (Data Transfer) 6-36

Indice


TTL (entradas)activar 6-32cableado electrónico 10-14cableado mecánico 10-13

TTL (salidas)activar 6-33cableado electrónico 10-14

TTLIO (conectores)datos técnicos 12-7entradas y salidas 10-13usado con titulador 10-13

Umbral 3-29, 3-51Unidad de medida (sensores) 2-8Unidades 3-67, 8-17, 8-18

Valoracióna punto de equivalencia 3-20, 3-45a punto final 3-37, 3-56de aprendizaje función 3-43en dos fases función 7-12EP (función) 3-37EP (Ipol/Upol) (función) 3-56EQP (función) 3-20EQP (Ipol/Upol) (función) 3-45manual 6-14manual (Ipol/Upol) 6-16método especial 7-12previa (func. pH/mV-Stato) 3-63resultados 5-9

Valoraciones Karl-Fischeraccesorios 11-12

Valor del umbralprocedimiento de evaluación estándar 3-30procedimiento de evaluación: asimétrica 3-30procedimiento de evaluación: mínimo/máximo

3-30procedimiento de evaluación: segmentada 3-31

Valor de semineutralización 3-20Valor medio x

func. cálculo 3-67func. título 3-72func. valor auxiliar 3-73

Valor(es) auxiliar(es)almacenar 2-16entrar 2-15función 3-73medios auxiliares 2-15registrar 2-15

Valores medidosinstrucciones para memorización 3-64, 3-74,

8-20número máximo/func. valoración 8-20visualizar 5-7, 6-21

VDISP 3-19, 8-7Velocidad bombeo (solventes) 2-27Velocidad de agitación

cambiar 5-8, 6-8definir 3-16

VEND 8-4VEQ 8-4Version software 1-1VEX 8-4Volumen

entrar 4-5, 5-6seleccionar 3-12

Volumen buretaincremento mínimo 3-24seleccionar 2-5

Volumen fijoaviso 5-5seleccionar 3-12

Volumen máximofunc. pH/mV-Stato 3-64func. valoración EP 3-42func. valoración EP (Ipol/Upol) 3-61func. valoración EQP 3-33func. valoración EQP (Ipol/Upol) 3-52


x (valor medio) 8-7

z (valencia, nº de equivalencia) 3-13, 3-68, 8-3ZERO (punto cero, electrodo) 8-3


Indice analitico

<F1>...<F5> 9, 10∆E

funzione Misurare 3-17funzione Titolazione EP 3-39funzione Titolazione EQP 3-25funzione Titolazione EQP (Ipol/Upol) 3-49

∆E(nom.)funzione Titolazione EP 3-39funzione Titolazione EQP 3-22

∆tfunzione Misurare 3-17funzione Titolazione EP 3-39funzione Titolazione EQP 3-25funzione Titolazione EQP (Ipol/Upol) 3-49

Abbreviare l’analisi 6-30Accessori

accessori facoltativi 11-7equipaggiamento di base 11-4

Accumulatore 6Aggiunta di titolante

funzione pH/mV-Stat 3-63funzione Titolazione a due fasi 7-14funzione Titolazione EP 3-39funzione Titolazione EP (Ipol/Upol) 3-60funzione Titolazione EQP 3-22funzione Titolazione EQP (Ipol/Upol) 3-48

Agitare (funzione) 3-16Agitatore

funzione ausiliaria (Stirrer) 6-8selezionare l’uscita 2-17

Allineamento degli ingressi di misura 6-28Analisi

arresto 5-11eclissare 5-11inizio 5-4interrompere (Reset) 5-12menu „Run“ 5-3svolgimento del menu 5-4

Arresto (parametri di)funzione pH/mV-Stat 3-64funzione Titolazione EP 3-42funzione Titolazione EP (Ipol/Upol) 3-61funzione Titolazione EQP 3-33funzione Titolazione EQP (Ipol/Upol) 3-52

Arresto per rivalutazione 3-35, 3-55, 5-11Asimmetrico (procedura di valutazione)

parametro di valutazione 3-34, 3-53riconoscimento del punto d’equivalenza 3-28,

3-50spiegazione 8-16

Asterisco (*) 3-4, 3-11Attivare

entrata comando a distanza 6-32uscita comando a distanza 6-32

Autocampionatorecollegare 10-10definire 2-25funzione ausiliaria (Changer) 6-9parametri dello stativo di titolazione 3-13serie di campioni 5-6, 5-15stativo di titolazione 2-17

Avanzamentodella pagina (stampante) 2-19delle linee (stampante) 2-19

Banca dati 12-5Banda di controllo

funzione pH/mV-Stat 3-63funzione Titolazione EP 3-40funzione Titolazione EP (Ipol/Upol) 3-60

Bidirezionale (modo di trasmissione) 2-21, 4-12Bilancia(e)

collegare 10-10configurazioni (METTLER TOLEDO) 2-22configurazioni (SARTORIUS) 2-22definire 2-21

Burettabolle d’aria 10-8inserire 10-6installare 10-4lavare 6-11manutenzione 10-4, 10-7montare 10-5riempire 13

Burette (buretta, funz. ausil.) 6-11

Indice analitico

I numeri separati da un trattino (esempio: 3-38) si riferiscono alle sezioni e pagine del manualed'uso, mentre i numeri senza trattino si riferiscono alle istruzioni di base (esempio: 9).

Indice analitico


C (costante) 3-66, 8-7c (conc. nominale) 8-3c * t (conc. reale) 8-3Calcoli supplementari 6-20Calcolo(i)

eseguire (funzione ausiliaria) 6-20formule 8-17funzione 3-66indici 8-9

Calibrareelettrodo pH 27funzione 3-69sonde 3-69sonde della temperatura 6-6

Cambiare la lingua 11, 6-27Campione (funzione) 3-12Campione attuale (maschera)

indicazioni 5-6Campione urgente (DL55/DL58) 4-10Campioni

numero massimo 8-20stato 4-7

Campo (punto di equivalenza) 3-32, 3-51Campo di regolazione


Carattere iniziale/finale (computer) 2-24Carta (stampante)

formato 2-19infinito 2-19pagina singola 2-19

Changer (autocampionatore, funz. ausil.) 6-9Code (funzione Sync) 7-18Codice a barre 6-43Coefficiente di correlazione 3-62, 3-65, 8-6Comando a distanza 6-42Combinazioni di tasti 10Computer

codice a barre 6-43collegare 10-10comando a distanza 6-42configurazione (titolatore) 2-23lettore di codici a barre 2-24trasmissione dei dati 6-40

Concentrazione (titolante) 2-4, 8-3Concetto

d’impiego 7di metodo 19

Condizionare (ST20A) 3-15Condizioni di arresto combinate 3-34, 3-53Conduttimetro 2-8

Connettore(i) TTLIOdati tecnici 12-7ingressi ed uscite 10-13utilizzati dal titolatore 10-13

Continua (aggiunta di titolante) 3-40, 3-60Controllo dall’ingresso

attivare l’uscita comando a distanza (funzioneausiliaria) 6-33

funzione Uscita comando a distanza 7-16Copia(e) della memoria

caricare sul titolatore 6-39copiare su scheda di memoria 6-39trasferire al computer 6-41

Costantiesempi 8-18funzione ausiliaria Calcoli 6-20funzione Calcolo 3-66

CSTAT (coefficiente di correlazione, pH-Stat)3-62, 8-6

Cursore 10Curve di titolazione

1a derivata 3-30, 3-31, 3-54, 8-152a derivata 3-31, 3-54, 8-15documentare 3-75, 6-24visualizzare 5-7, 5-8, 6-21

Cx (costante di calcolo) 8-7

Dataintrodurre 6-27selezionare il formato 6-26

Data (indicazione)metodi 3-11sonde 2-9sonde della temperatura 2-11titolanti 2-5valori ausiliari 2-15

Data di scadenza (titolante) 5-4Data Transfer (trasferimento dei dati, funz. ausil.)

6-36Dati di calibrazione

ingressi di misura 6-29sonde 2-9, 2-10, 3-69sonde della temperatura 2-12

Dati dei campioniaggiungere 4-8cancellare 4-6condizioni di memorizzazione 36, 4-3definire dal computer 4-13documentare 3-75, 6-24introdurre 4-4, 5-5, 5-10modificare 4-7stampare 4-7


Indice analitico

Dati tecniciagitatore 12-5buretta 12-5connettore Centronics 12-8connettore RS232C (Opzione RS) 12-9connettori TTLIO 12-7display 12-5connettore DIN 12-7memoria 12-5motore della buretta 12-5periferiche 12-6sistema di misura 12-3spina RS232C (Opzione Centronics) 12-7uscite 12-4

Deriva (misura del potenziale) 3-17Deviazione standard relativa srel 3-67Deviazione standard s 3-67Dinamica (aggiunta di titolante)

funzione Titolazione EP 3-39funzione Titolazione EQP 3-22

Disturbi 9-6DL58

comandi 7-3funzioni 7-3mezzi ausiliari 7-3

DLWin Software 4-13, 6-41Documentazione

informazioni 4Dosaggio

continuo 6-13continuo (Ipol/Upol) 6-15

Dosarefunzione 3-19funzione ausiliaria (buretta) 6-12funzione ausiliaria (ST20A) 6-10

E (potenziale) 3-17, 8-7ESC (<F1>) 9EHNV (valore di semineutralizzazione) 3-20, 8-4Elettrodi (METTLER TOLEDO) 2-7, 2-13Elettrodo di riferimento 2-7Elettrodo per pH

calibrare 26pendenza 26punto zero 26

Emissione (protocolli) 3-74, 6-24EP

assoluto 3-41relativo 3-41

EPOT 8-4Esperto (livello utente) 6-31Estinzione 2-8ET1 3-22, 3-38, 8-4ET2 3-22, 3-38, 8-4

f (fattore di correzione) 4-6, 5-6, 8-3Formula(e)

costanti 8-18funzione ausiliaria Calcoli 6-20funzione Calcolo 3-66funzione Titolo 3-72funzione Valore ausiliario 3-73per circoscrivere il punto di equivalenza 8-19risultati 8-17

Funzione(i)aggiungere 7-8cancellare 7-8DL58 7-3modificare 3-10numero massimo 7-9riassunto 24selezionare 3-7spiegazione 20, 3-3

Funzioni ausiliarieriassunto 1-4, 1-5spiegazione 9, 6-3tasti 6-3

Funzioni di calcolo 3-66

H (valore ausiliario) 2-15, 8-3

ID (identificazione) dei metodidefinire 3-11introdurre 4-4, 5-5metodi METTLER 3-6metodi standard 3-5modificare 3-9spiegazione 3-4

ID del campione 4-5, 5-6In 3.1/3.2 (ingressi TTL) 6-32In funzione/stop (modo di controllo)

attivare uscita comando a distanza (funzioneausiliaria) 6-33

funzione Uscita comando a distanza 7-16Incrementale (aggiunta di titolante) 3-24, 3-48,

7-14Indicazione

funzione Titolazione EP (Ipol/Upol) 3-57funzione Titolazione EQP (Ipol/Upol) 3-46

Indicazione amperometricafunzione Titolazione EP (Ipol/Upol) 3-58funzione Titolazione EQP (Ipol/Upol) 3-47

Indicazione del tempometodi 3-11sonde 2-9sonde della temperatura 2-11titolanti 2-5valori ausiliari 2-15

Indice analitico


Indicazione voltametricafunzione Titolazione EP (Ipol/Upol) 3-57funzione Titolazione EQP (Ipol/Upol) 3-46

Indicazioni di sicurezza 1-1Indice (scheda di memoria) 6-37Indici

esempi 8-9, 8-10riassunto 8-12

Ingressi del comando a distanzadefinire 7-4mezzi ausiliari 7-4

Ingressi TTLattivare 6-32avvolg. elettronico („wiring“) 10-14avvolg. meccanico 10-13

Ingresso del comando a distanzaattivare (funzione ausiliaria) 6-32funzione 7-15

Ingresso delle sondesonde 2-8sonde della temperatura 2-11sonde polarizzate 2-13

Installazione (menu "Setup") 2-3Installazione e manutenzione 10-3Interfaccia Centronics

configurazioni delle stampanti 2-19stampante GA42 2-18

Interfaccia RS232configurazioni delle stampanti 2-20stampante GA42 2-20

Interpolazione (valutazione) 8-14Intervallo (condizionare) 3-15Intervallo di memorizzazione (funz. pH/mV-Stat)

3-64Istruzione

ESC (<F1>) 9funz. Uscita comando a distanza 7-17funzione 7-11OK (<F5>) 9modificare (<F4>) 10

LabX Software 4-13, 6-41Lavare

funzione ausiliaria (ST20A) 6-10parametri dello stativo di titolazione 3-14la punta 6-12

Lettore di codici a barrecollegare 10-16definire 2-24

Limiti di pesointrodurre 3-12introduzione dei dati dei campioni 4-5, 5-6

Limiti di volumeintrodurre 3-12introduzione dei dati dei campioni 4-5, 5-6

Linee di cornice (protocollo) 2-19Lingua (cambiare) 11, 6-27Lista dei dati dei campioni 4-4, 4-6Lista dei risultati

bloccare 6-30indicazioni 5-9visualizzare 6-18

Liste (spiegazione) 8Livello utente 6-31

M (massa molare) 3-68, 8-3m (quantità del campione) 8-3Manuale (introduzione della temperatura) 3-13Manutenzione

buretta 10-7titolatore 10-3

Maschera dei dati del campionemenu Analisi 5-5menu "Sample" 4-5

Maschere (spiegazione) 8Massa molare M

introdurre 3-13funzione Calcolo 3-68

Massimo (procedura di valutazione)parametri di valutazione 3-34, 3-53riconoscimento del punto d’equivalenza 3-28,


Memoria dei dati dei campioni (menu "Sample")4-3

Memoria dei dati utente 12-5Memoria dei valori ausiliari 3-73Memorizzare

dati dei campioni 4-3metodi 3-7risultati 8-20risultati grezzi 8-20sensori polarizzati 2-13solventi 2-28sonde 2-10sonde della temperatura 2-12strumenti per ingresso comando a distanza 7-5strumenti per uscita comando a distanza 7-6titolanti 2-6valori ausiliari 2-16valori misurati 3-64, 3-74, 8-20

Menusriassunto 1-2, 1-3spiegazione 8tasti 8


Indice analitico

Messaggi di errorecon riferimento al cap. 9.1 9-3"EPROM test failed" 9-3"RAM test failed" 9-3Titolazione in auto-studio 5-11

Metodimenu 3-3selezionare 3-4stampare la lista 3-4

Metodi METTLER90001: Esecuzione 1490002: Esecuzione 27modificare 25, 3-6spiegazione 19stampare 3-6

Metodi specialiDL58 7-7spiegazione 7-3

Metodi standardesempi di applicazione 22funzioni 20modificare 25, 30numero 20spiegazione 19, 3-5stampare 3-5

Metodi utentecancellare 3-6copiare su scheda di memoria 6-38copiare sul titolatore 6-39spiegazione 19, 3-6stampare 3-6titolo con titolazione EQP 34trasferire al computer 6-41

Metodoa partire dal computer 4-5cancellare 3-5memorizzare 3-7modificare 3-7modificare (metodo in corso: DL55/DL58) 5-13modificare (serie di campioni in corso) 5-12realizzare 24spiegazione 3-3stampare 3-4sulla scheda di memoria 4-5

Mezzi ausiliaricambiare 5-8cancellare 2-3copiare su scheda di memoria 6-39copiare sul titolatore 6-39DL58 7-3lista 2-3modificare 2-3spiegazione 2-3stampare 2-3trasferire al computer 6-41

Minimo (procedura di valutazione)parametro di valutazione 3-34, 3-53riconoscimento del punto di equivalenza 3-28,


Misc. ... (Varia) 6-26Misura controllata all’equilibrio

funzione Misurare 3-17funzione Titolazione EP 3-39funzione Titolazione EQP 3-25funzione Titolazione EQP (Ipol/Upol) 3-49

Misura in modo incrementale (tempo)funzione Titolazione EP 3-41funzione Titolazione EP (Ipol/Upol) 3-60funzione Titolazione EQP 3-27funzione Titolazione EQP (Ipol/Upol) 3-49

Misurarefunzione 3-17il pH 35il potenziale 6-4, 6-7la corrente (Ipol/Upol) 6-7la tensione (Ipol/Upol) 6-7

Misure di conducibilità 2-8Misure di sicurezza

per la sicurezza sul lavoro 5per la Sua incolumità 5, 10-3

Modificare: istruzione (<F4>) 10Modo di controllo (attivare uscita TTL)

controllato dall’entrata 6-33in funzione/stop 6-33sequenziale 6-34

Modo di controllo (uscite TTL)controllato dall’entrata 7-16in funzione/stop 7-16sequenziale 7-17tempo fisso 7-16

Modo di misurafunzione Titolazione a due fasi 7-14funzione Titolazione EQP 3-25funzione Titolazione EQP (Ipol/Upol) 3-49

Modo di sincronizzazione (funzione Sync) 7-18Modo di trasmissione (computer) 2-24Modo di trasmissione (bilancia)

bidirezionale 2-21unidirezionale 2-21

Motore della burettainserire 10-3selezionare 2-5

Indice analitico


neq (numero di punti di equivalenza) 8-4No. bits dei dati

computer 2-24stampante 2-20terminale 2-25

No. bits di stopcomputer 2-24stampante 2-20terminale 2-25

Numero di equivalenzafunzione Calcolo 3-68introdurre 3-13

OK (<F5>) 9Opzione Centronics

installare 10-10possibilità di collegamento 10-9

Opzione KFingressi di misura: dati di calibrazione 6-29ingressi ed uscite 10-10installare 10-11sonde polarizzate 2-13

Opzione pHingressi di misura: dati di calibrazione 6-29ingressi ed uscite 10-10installare 10-11sonde 2-7

Opzione RSinstallare 10-11possibilità di collegamento 10-11

Orologio (titolatore) 6Out 3.1...3.4 (uscite TTL) 6-33

P1/P2 8-6Parametri (spiegazione) 20Parità

bilance 2-22computer 2-23stampante 2-20terminale 2-25

Pendenzacalcolo 3-69elettrodo per pH 26spiegazione 2-9trascrizione automatica 2-9valore minimo/massimo 3-71valore teorico 2-9

Periferiche (menu "Setup") 2-18Peso

introdurre 4-5, 5-6selezionare 3-12trasferire dalla bilancia 4-12

pH-Stat (esempio) 3-65pH/mV-Stat (funzione) 3-62Piatto rotante (autocampionatore) 6-10Pistone

inserire nella buretta 10-4montare 10-4

Pompefunzione 7-11parametri dello stativo di titolazione 3-13

Posizione del lift (autocampionatore) 6-9Posizioni delle opzioni 10-9Potenziale

1/2 (parametri di valutazione) 3-35, 3-54iniziale ET1 3-22

Predosaggiofunzione Titolazione a due fasi 7-13funzione Titolazione EP 3-38funzione Titolazione EP (Ipol/Upol) 3-59funzione Titolazione EQP 3-21funzione Titolazione EQP (Ipol/Upol) 3-48

Pretitolazione (funzione pH/mV-Stat) 3-63Procedura di valutazione

funzione Titolazione EQP 3-28, 3-34funzione Titolazione EQP (Ipol/Upol) 3-50, 3-53spiegazione 8-14

Protocollofunzione 3-74funzione ausiliaria (Report) 6-24di comunicazione (computer) 2-24

Punti di misuracondizioni di memorizzazione 3-64, 3-74, 8-20numero massimo/funz. Titolazione 8-20visualizzare 5-7, 6-21

Punti di misura per il riconoscimento del punto diequivalenza 3-28, 3-44, 3-50

Punto di inflessione 8-14Punto finale


Punto zero (sonda)calcolo 3-69elettrodo per pH 26spiegazione 2-9trascrizione automatica 2-9valore teorico 2-9

Punto zero (sonda della temperatura)spiegazione 2-11trascrizione automatica 2-12valore teorico 2-12


Indice analitico

Punto(i) di equivalenzacampo 3-32, 3-51formule per circoscrivere 8-19numero massimo/determinazione di campioni

8-20riconoscimento 3-28, 3-50spiegazione 3-20, 3-45, 8-14

Q 8-4QDISP 3-19, 8-7QEND 8-4QEX 8-4QP1/QP2 8-4QSTAT 8-6QT1/QT2 8-6QTOT 8-6Quantità del campione 3-21, 3-38, 3-48, 3-59, 8-3

R (risultati) 3-66, 8-7Report (protocollo) 6-24Reset (tasto) 7, 5-12Results (risultati) 6-18Riconoscimento (punto di equivalenza) 3-28, 3-50Risultati grezzi

condizioni di memorizzazione 8-20documentare 3-75, 6-24riassunto 8-8spiegazione 3-18

Risultato(i)cancellare 6-22condizioni di memorizzazione 8-20documentare 3-75, 6-24esempi 3-67, 8-17funzione ausiliaria (Results) 6-18numero massimo/serie di campioni 8-20R 3-66, 3-71Rx 6-20titolazione in auto-studio 5-9unità 3-67, 8-17

Ritardo nell’arresto 3-42, 3-61Rivalutazione

condizione soddisfatta 5-11definire la condizione 3-35, 3-36, 3-55eseguire 6-18

Routine (livello utente) 6-31Run

funzione dei tasti 5-3menu Analisi 5-3

s (deviazione standard) 8-7Sample (menu Memoria dei dati dei campioni) 4-3Scheda di memoria

formattare 6-36, 6-40indice 6-37inserire 10-11interfaccia 12-6tipi 12-6uso 6-36

Scheda tecnicaopzione KF 10-12opzione pH 10-12

Segmentato (procedura di valutazione)parametro di valutazione 3-34, 3-53riconoscimento del punto di equivalenza 3-28,


Segnaleacustico 6-28d’ingresso (funz. ingresso comando a dist.) 7-15

Sequenzialeattivare l’uscita comando a distanza (funzione

ausiliaria) 6-34funzione Uscita comando a distanza 7-17

Serie di campionicancellare 4-6con ST20A 5-6, 5-15con stativo auto 5-6, 5-15introdurre 4-4

Serie di campioni (DL55/DL58)eseguire 5-15introdurre 4-9

Setup (menu Installazione) 2-3simbolilista 8-3spiegazione 8-3

Sistemacomputer/terminale 2-23informazioni 9-3, 9-6

SLOPE (pendenza degli elettrodi) 8-3Software LabX 4-13, 6-41Soglia 3-29, 3-51Solo il salto più ripido 3-31Soluzioni tampone

tamponi DIN/NIST 3-70tamponi MERCK 3-69tamponi METTLER TOLEDO 3-69

Solventiaggiungere 2-28cancellare 2-27memorizzare 2-28modificare 2-27

Indice analitico


Sonda Pt100/Pt1000 2-11Sonda(e)

aggiungere 2-10cancellare 2-7funzione ausiliaria 6-4mezzi ausiliari 2-7modificare 2-7opzione pH 2-10

Sonda(e) della temperaturacalibrare 6-6memorizzare 2-12mezzi ausiliari 2-11Pt100/Pt1000 2-11selezionare 3-13spina per connettore Lemo 10-10

Sonda(e) polarizzateaggiungere 2-14memorizzare 2-13mezzi ausiliari 2-13modificare 2-13opzione KF 2-13

Sono definiti (maschera)bloccare 6-30significato 5-5

Sostanza standard primaria 30, 31srel (deviazione standard relativa) 8-7ST20A

collegare 10-10uscite 2-28

StampanteASCII 2-18collegare 10-10configurazioni 2-19, 2-20definire 2-18

Standard (procedura di valutazione)parametro di valutazione 3-34, 3-53riconoscimento del punto di equivalenza 3-28,


Statisticamodificare 6-22includere nel calcolo 3-67

Stativo 1/2 (stativi di titolazione) 2-17Stativo auto

definizione 2-17serie di campioni 5-6, 5-15

Stativo di titolazionemezzi ausiliari 2-17montare 10-8no. di comanda 11-7selezionare 3-13significato 7-8

Stativo esterno 2-17Stato

campioni 4-7comando a distanza 6-42periferiche 2-18

Stirrer (agitatore) 6-8Svolgimento dell’analisi (esempi)

calibrazione dell'elettrodo per pH 27con l’autocampionatore 5-17confronto: stativo di titol. 1/ST20A 5-16determinazione del titolo (NaOH) 32determinazione di CaCl2 5-7titolazione pH-Stat 5-10

Sync (funzione) 7-18

T (temperatura) 7-10t (titolo) 3-72, 8-3t(max)

funzione Misurare 3-18funzione Temperatura 7-10funzione Titolazione EP 3-39funzione Titolazione EQP 3-25funzione Titolazione EQP (Ipol/Upol) 3-49

t(min)funzione Misurare 3-17funzione Temperatura 7-10funzione Titolazione EP 3-39funzione Titolazione EQP 3-25funzione Titolazione EQP (Ipol/Upol) 3-49

Tabella dei valori misuratidocumentare 3-75, 6-24visualizzare 5-7, 6-21

Tastidelle istruzioni 9di introduzione 10freccia 7Reset 7, 5-12

Tastieraesterna 2-26titolatore 7

Tastiera esternaassegnazione dei tasti 10-15collegare 10-15definire 2-26

Temperaturacorrettura 3-13, 3-69funzione 7-10introdurre 2-9, 4-6, 5-6misurare 2-9, 3-13, 3-18, 3-20, 3-37, 3-62,

3-69, 7-10misurare (funzione ausiliaria) 6-5


Indice analitico

Tempodi agitazione 3-16di attesa 3-16di mescolazione (funz. Titol. a due fasi) 7-14di separazione (funz. Titol. a due fasi) 7-14fisso (funz. Uscita comando a dist.) 7-16funzione Agitare 3-16, 5-7funzione Campione (condizionare) 3-15introdurre 6-27massimo (funz. Ingresso comando a dist.) 7-15massimo (funzione Titolazione EP (Ipol/Upol))

3-61selezionare il formato 6-26TIME 5-4

Tendenzafunzione pH/mV-Stat 3-64funzione Titolazione EP 3-42funzione Titolazione EP (Ipol/Upol) 3-61funzione Titolazione EQP 3-32funzione Titolazione EQP (Ipol/Upol) 3-51

Terminaleassegnazione dei tasti 10-17collegare 10-11configurazione 10-16configurazione (titolatore) 2-25

Testata del protocollo 6-27TIME 5-4, 8-3Titolante

aggiungere 2-6cancellare 2-4concentrazione 2-4, 8-3memorizzare 2-6modificare 2-4

Titolatoreaccumulatore 6aprire l’involucro 10-3autodiagnosi 7collegamenti 6, 10-10comando a distanza 6-42configurazione (titolatore) 6-26documentazione 4ID (identificazione) 6-27orologio interno 6pulire l’involucro 10-3tastiera 7vista anteriore 6vista dorsale 6, 10-10

Titolazionea punto d’equivalenza 3-20, 3-45a punto finale 3-37, 3-56EP (funzione) 3-37EP (Ipol/Upol) (funzione) 3-56EQP (funzione) 3-20EQP (Ipol/Upol) (funzione) 3-45manuale 6-14manuale (Ipol/Upol) 6-16

Titolazione a due fasifunzione 7-12metodo speciale 7-12

Titolazione in auto-studiofunzione 3-43resultati 5-9

Titolazione Karl Fischeraccessori 11-12

Titolofunzione 3-11metodi METTLER 19metodi standard 19

Titolo (concentrazione)controllare 2-5determinazione (sol. di NaOH) 32funzione 3-72introdurre 2-4spiegazione 30trascrizione automatica 2-4

Trasferimento dei dati (Data Transfer) 6-36

Unidirezionale (modo di trasmissione) 2-21Unità 3-67, 8-17, 8-18Unità di misura (sonde) 2-8Uscita del comando a distanza

attivare (funzione ausiliaria) 6-33funzione 7-16

Uscite del comando a distanzadefinire 7-5mezzi ausiliari 7-5

Uscite TTLattivare 6-33avvolg. elettronico („wiring“) 10-14

Indice analitico


Valore(i) ausiliare(i)funzione 3-73introdurre 2-15memorizzare 2-16mezzi ausiliari 2-15trascrizione automatica 2-15

Valore di semineutralizzazione 3-20Valore di soglia

procedura di valutazione: asimmetrico 3-30procedura di valutazione: minimo/massimo 3-30procedura di valutazione: segmentato 3-31procedura di valutazione: standard 3-30

Valore medio xfunzione Calcolo 3-67funzione Titolo 3-72funzione Valore ausiliario 3-73

Valutazionefunzione pH/mV-Stat 3-65funzione Titolazione EQP 3-34funzione Titolazione EQP (Ipol/Upol) 3-53

Varia (Misc. ...) 6-26VDISP 3-19, 8-7Velocità (agitatore)

definire 3-16modificare 5-8, 6-8

Velocità della pompa (solventi) 2-27Velocità di trasmissione

bilance 2-22computer 2-23stampante 2-20terminale 2-25

VEND 8-4VEQ 8-4Versione del software 1-1VEX 8-4Vista dorsale del titolatore 10-9Volume

introdurre 4-5, 5-6selezionare 3-12

Volume della burettal’incremento più piccolo 3-24selezionare 2-5

Volume fissoavviso 5-5selezionare 3-12

Volume massimofunzione pH/mV-Stat 3-64funzione Titolazione EP 3-42funzione Titolazione EP (Ipol/Upol) 3-61funzione Titolazione EQP 3-33funzione Titolazione EQP (Ipol/Upol) 3-52


x (valore medio) 8-7

z (numero di equivalenza) 3-13, 3-68, 8-3ZERO (punto zero degli elettrodi) 8-3


ContentsPage

ISO 9001 certificate for METTLER TOLEDO ...................................................................... 15-3

Certificado ISO 9001 para METTLER TOLEDO ................................................................. 15-3

Certificato ISO 9001 per la METTLER TOLEDO ................................................................ 15-3

Declaration of System Validation ................................................................................ 15-4

Déclaración de validación del sistema ........................................................................ 15-6

Dichiarazione di validazione del sistema .................................................................... 15-8


ISO 9001 certificate for METTLER TOLEDOThe Mettler-Toledo GmbH company, Greifensee, was examined and evaluated in 1991 bythe Swiss Association for Quality and Management Systems (SQS), and was awarded theISO 9001 certificate. This certifies that Mettler-Toledo GmbH, Greifensee, has a qualitymanagement system that conforms with the international standards of the ISO 9000 series.Repeat audits are carried out by the SQS at intervals to check that the quality managementsystem is operated in the proper manner and is continuously updated in relation to changesbrought about.

Certificado ISO 9001 para METTLER TOLEDOLa firma Mettler-Toledo GmbH, Greifensee, ha sido inspeccionada por la Asociación Suizapara Sistemas de Calidad y Gestión (SQS), habiendo obtenido el certificado ISO 9001.Esto acredita que Mettler-Toledo GmbH, Greifensee, dispone de un sistema de gestión decalidad que cumple las normas internacionales (ISO serie 9000).Con motivo de las inspecciones de repetibilidad por parte de la SQS, se compruebaperiódicamente si el sistema de gestión de calidad se manipula correctamente y se ajustade modo continuo.

Certificato ISO 9001 per la METTLER TOLEDOIl sistema di garanzia della qualità della Società Mettler-Toledo GmbH, Greifensee, ècertificato ISO 9001 sin dal 1991 dall'Associazione Svizzera per Sistemi di Qualità e diGestione (SQS), e così fornisce la dimostrazione che il suo sistema Garanzia di Qualitàsoddisfa i massimi requisiti.Il sistema della garanzia della qualità Mettler-Toledo viene verificato periodicamente SQS,dando così evidenza di un continuo aggiornamento e corretta gestione.


Declaration of System Validation

We herewith inform you that the products/systems:

DL50, DL53, DL55, DL58

including software and accessories were developed, tested and successfully validated according to theinternational ISO9001:1994 based Life cycle rules of Mettler-Toledo GmbH, Analytical.Life cycle checkpoint details were reviewed and approved by the Project Supervisory Group (PSG). Theproducts/systems were tested to meet functional and performance specifications and release criteria atrelease to shipment. In order to support GLP and validation requirements, we will make the followingdocuments available to an authorized, governmental or regulatory agency for inspection.

• Product Guidelines• Performance Specifications• Documentation Plan• Software Specifications• Quality Plan• Project Management System• Test Plan• Customer Requirements• Review Reports• Source Code

Mettler-Toledo GmbH, Analytical will maintain possession of all documents and their reproductions andmay require a non-disclosure agreement to be provided by those requiring access to these documents.

Schwerzenbach, Dr. Bernhard Grob Dr. Urs SpitzJanuary 1999 General Manager Manager Business Area

Business Unit Analytical Titration


Product Life Cycle Model

Ideas

Project Study

Project Start

Project End

Phase:Basic Know how

Phase:Feasibility

Phase:Confirmation

Usage

Phase out

Customer Complaints (CRIS)

Customer Requirements

Project Release

Product Guidelines

Performance Specifications

Quality Plan

Software Specifications

Test Plan

Review Report

Review Report

Phase:Readiness Review Report

Documentation Plan

Project Plan

Review Report


Déclaración de validación del sistema

Por la presente le informamos que los productos/sistemas

DL50, DL53, DL55, DL58

incluido el software y los accesorios, han sido desarrollados, probados y verificados con éxito de acuerdocon las reglas sobre ciclo de vida de producto de Mettler-Toledo GmbH, Analytical. Estas reglas se basanen la norma 9001:1994.Los puntos de control de proyecto han sido comprobados y ratificados por el grupo de Control de Proyecto(Project Supervisory Group o PSG). La comprobación de los productos/sistemas se ha realizado antesde su entrega. Como apoyo a las exigencias GLP y de validación, ponemos el siguiente material adisposición de las personas autorizadas para su examen:

• Imagen del producto• Especificaciones• Documentación del proyecto• Especificaciones del software• Plan de calidad• Directiva Gestión de Proyecto• Plan de ensayos• Datos del servicio postventa y de deseos del cliente• Protocolos de revisión• Código fuente

Mettler-Toledo GmbH, Analytical, conservará la propiedad de todo el material y sus reproducciones yllegará a un acuerdo de confidencialidad con quienes quieran examinar este material.

Schwerzenbach, Dr. Berbhard Grob Dr. Urs SpitzEnero 1999 General Manager Manager Business Area



Modelo del ciclo de vida de un producto

Ideas

Estudio del proyecto

Comienzo delproyecto

Fin del proyecto

Fase:Conocimientosbásicos

Fase:Viabilidad

Fase:Verificación

Utilización

Sustitución

Servicio técnico (CRIS)

Deseos del cliente

Encargo del proyecto

Imagen del producto

Especificaciones

Plan de calidad

Especificaciones del software

Plan de ensayos

Protocolo de revisión


Fase:Preparación Protocolo de revisión

Documentación del proyecto

Plan del proyecto



Dichiarazione di validazione del sistema

Con la presente Vi informiamo che i prodotti/sistemi

DL50, DL53, DL55, DL58

inclusi software e accessori sono stati sviluppati, controllati e validati secondo le regole tecnicherelative al ciclo vita dei prodotti della Mettler-Toledo GmbH, Analytical. Queste regole si basano sullenorme ISO 9001:1994.I dettagli di controllo del progetto sono stati verificati ed approvati dall'organo di supervisione delprogetto (PSG: Project Supervisory Board). I prodotti/sistemi sono stati controllati e verificati primadella fornitura. Per soddisfare le richieste di validazione e GLP i seguenti documenti sono messi adisposizione per la visione da parte di personale autorizzato:

• Specifiche del prodotto• Linee direttive• Documentazione del progetto• Specifiche del software• Sistema di qualità• Disposizioni per la gestione del progetto• Piano dei test• Dati del servizio clientela/esigenze dei clienti• Rapporti di revisione• Codice originale

La Mettler-Toledo GmbH, Analytical, rimarrà in possesso di tutti i documenti e di tutte le loro copie econtrarrà un accordo di discrezione con coloro che desiderassero visionare tali documenti.

Schwerzenbach, Dr. Bernhard Grob Dr. Urs SpitzGennaio 1999 General Manger Manager Business Area



Modello di ciclo vita di un prodotto

Idee

Studio del progetto

Inizio del progetto

Fine del progetto

Fase:Conoscenze dibase

Fase:Fattibilità

Fase:Conferma

Utilizzazione

Sostituzione

Servizio clientela (CRIS)

Esigenze dei clienti

Specifiche del prodotto

Linee direttive

Sistema di qualità

Specifiche del software

Piano dei test

Rapporto di revisione


Fase:Disponibilità Rapporto di revisione

Documentazione del progetto

Sistema del progetto


Realizzazione del progetto

© Mettler-Toledo GmbH 1997, 1998, 1999, 2003, 2004 ME-51709614F Printed in Switzerland 0408/2.12

Subject to technical changes and to the availabilityof the accessories supplied with the instruments.

Printed on 100% chlorine-free paper, for the sake of our environment.

To protect your METTLER TOLEDO product’s future:METTLER TOLEDO Service assures the quality, measuring accuracy andpreservation of value of all METTLER TOLEDO products for years to come.Please send for full details about our attractive terms of service.Thank you.

*P51709614*

Mettler-Toledo GmbH, Analytical, Sonnenbergstrasse 74, CH-8603 Schwerzenbach,Tel. ++41 1 806 77 11, Fax ++41 1 806 73 50, Internet: http://www.mt.com

51709614 01 2.12 ts - boston laboratory equipment...08/2004 mettler toledo dl50/dl53/dl55/dl58 1-1...

Documents